Anritsu MG3710A Operation Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Anritsu Manuals
  4. Inverter
  5. MG3710A
  6. Operation manual

Anritsu MG3710A Operation Manual

Vector & analog signal generator
Hide thumbs Also See for MG3710A:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Configuration Manual
MG3710A
Vector Signal Generator
MG3740A
Analog Signal Generator
Operation Manual
Ninth Edition
For safety and warning information, please read this
manual before attempting to use the equipment.
Keep this manual with the equipment.
ANRITSU CORPORATION
Document No.: M-W3580AE-9.0

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MG3710A and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Anritsu MG3710A

Summary of Contents for Anritsu MG3710A

  • Page 1 MG3710A Vector Signal Generator MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual Ninth Edition For safety and warning information, please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment. Keep this manual with the equipment. ANRITSU CORPORATION Document No.: M-W3580AE-9.0...

  • Page 2: Safety Symbols

    Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the following symbols may be used on all Anritsu equipment. In addition, there may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual.

  • Page 3: For Safety

    Calibration equipment. To ensure the continued integrity of the equipment, only Anritsu service personnel, or service personnel of an Anritsu sales representative, should break this seal to repair or calibrate the equipment. Be careful not to break the seal by opening the equipment or unit covers.
  • Page 4 For Safety WARNING Falling Over • This equipment should always be positioned in the correct manner. If the cabinet is turned on its side, etc., it will be unstable and may be damaged if it falls over as a result of receiving a slight mechanical shock.
  • Page 5 For Safety CAUTION Cleaning • Always remove the main power cable from the power outlet before cleaning dust around the power supply and fan. • Clean the power inlet regularly. If dust accumulates around the power pins, there is a risk of fire. •...
  • Page 6 • The external storage media may be damaged by static electric charges. • Anritsu has thoroughly tested all external storage media shipped with this equipment. Users should note that external storage media not shipped with this equipment may not have been tested by Anritsu, thus Anritsu cannot guarantee the performance or suitability of such media.
  • Page 7 To prevent this chance occurrence, all important data and programs should be backed-up. Anritsu will not be held responsible for lost data. To reduce the possibility of data loss, particular attention should be given to the following points.
  • Page 8 In addition, this warranty is valid only for the original equipment purchaser. It is not transferable if the equipment is resold. Anritsu Corporation shall assume no liability for injury or financial loss of the customer due to the use of or a failure to be able to use this equipment.
  • Page 9 Anritsu Corporation Contact In the event that this equipment malfunctions, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office. Contact information can be found on the last page of the printed version of this manual, and is available in a separate file on the CD version.
  • Page 10 Cautions against computer virus infection • Copying files and data Only files that have been provided directly from Anritsu or generated using Anritsu equipment should be copied to the instrument. All other required files should be transferred by means of USB or CompactFlash media after undergoing a thorough virus check.
  • Page 11 Anritsu electronic equipment). By reading this EULA and using this software, you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of its contents and Anritsu Corporation (hereafter Anritsu) hereby grants you the right to use this Software with the Anritsu-specified equipment (hereafter Equipment) for the purposes set out in this EULA.
  • Page 12 Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity otherwise, due to your violation of the terms List. By using this Software, you warrant of this EULA, Anritsu shall have the right to that you are not located in any such country seek proportional damages from you.
  • Page 13 2002/96/EC (the “WEEE Directive”) in European Union. For Products placed on the EU market after August 13, 2005, please contact your local Anritsu representative at the end of the product's useful life to arrange disposal in accordance with your initial contract and the local law.
  • Page 14 Notice The following actions are strictly prohibited for all of the software installed in this product or otherwise provided by Anritsu: 1. Copying, except for archival purposes. 2. Transferring to a third party separately from this product. 3. Analyzing the incorporated software including but not limited to modifying, decompiling, disassembling, and reverse engineering.
  • Page 15 CE Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the CE conformity marking on the following product(s) in accordance with the Council Directive 93/68/EEC to indicate that they conform to the EMC and LVD directive of the European Union (EU). CE marking 1. Product Model...
  • Page 16 : No limits apply for this equipment with an active input power under 75 W. • LVD: EN 61010-1: 2010 (Pollution Degree 2) 4. Authorized representative Name: Murray Coleman Head of Customer Service EMEA ANRITSU EMEA Ltd. Address, city: 200 Capability Green, Luton Bedfordshire, LU1 3LU Country: United Kingdom...
  • Page 17 C-Tick Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the C-Tick mark on the following product(s) in accordance with the regulation to indicate that they conform to the EMC framework of Australia/New Zealand. C-Tick mark 1. Product Model Model: MG3710A Vector Signal Generator MG3740A Analog Signal Generator 2.
  • Page 18 About Eco label The label shown on the left is attached to Anritsu products meeting our environmental standards. Details about this label and the environmental standards are available on the Anritsu website at http://www.anritsu.com xviii...

  • Page 19: About This Manual

    Operation Manuals for each communication system Scope of This Manual This manual mainly describes operation, maintenance, and remote control of the MG3710A Vector Signal Generator. Description of the basic functions and the outline of operation start from Chapter 3 onwards.

  • Page 20: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents For Safety ............ About This Manual........Chapter 1 Outline ........Product Overview ............Product Configuration ........... Chapter 2 Preparation ........ Installation Location ........... .. Items to Check Before Use .......... Power Connection ............Chapter 3 Operation ........Part Names..............
  • Page 21 Chapter 5 Output Level ......Output Level ..............Output Level Setting Method: Level ......Output Level Setting Item ..........5-14 User Correction: Correction .......... 5-30 Use Power Sensor ............5-45 Chapter 6 Sweep/List ......... Sweep/List Function ............Setting Item ..............Sweep Function ............
  • Page 22 Chapter 9 Other Functions ......Auxiliary Function ............Power Meter ..............Alarm History ..............9-20 Utility Function .............. 9-24 Panel Keys ..............9-52 Touch Panel ..............9-78 Setting Windows ............9-79 Chapter 10 Performance Test ..... 10-1 10.1 Overview of Performance Test ........10-2 10.2 Frequency Performance Test ........
  • Page 23 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form ..........Appendix E Remote Control ....... Appendix F Native Device Message Details ..........Appendix G SCPI Compatible Command .. Appendix H Panel Keys and Keyboard Operations ..... Appendix I Scanning for Virus ....Appendix J MG3641A/42A Compatible Command ...

  • Page 25: Chapter 1 Outline

    Chapter 1 Outline This section provides an outline of the product and describes the product composition. Product Overview ............1-2 Product Configuration ........... 1-3 1.2.1 Standard configuration ........1-3 1.2.2 Options ............. 1-4 1.2.3 Applicable parts ..........1-8 1.2.4 Application software ........1-10...

  • Page 26: Product Overview

    Chapter 1 Outline 1.1 Product Overview The MG3710A is a vector signal generator that includes an arbitrary waveform generator. It can be used for a wide range of applications, from R&D to manufacturing of digital mobile communication systems, devices, and equipment.

  • Page 27: Product Configuration

    Product Configuration 1.2 Product Configuration 1.2.1 Standard configuration Table 1.2.1-1 lists the standard composition of the MG3710A/MG3740A. At unpacking, check that all items are included. If anything is missing or damaged, contact Anritsu Corporation or one of its distributors. Table 1.2.1-1 Standard Composition...

  • Page 28: Options

    Note: There is a risk of losing the data when adding additional option(s), so back up the data stored on the hard disk, in advance. Anritsu is not responsible for any loss of data. Table 1.2.2-1 Additional Options at Shipping (MG3710A) Option No.
  • Page 29 Product Configuration Table 1.2.2-1 Additional Options at Shipping (MG3710A) (Cont'd) Option No. Product Name Remarks MG3710A-078 Combination of Baseband Signal for 2nd RF MG3710A-079 AWGN for 2nd RF MG3710A-080 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 2nd RF MG3710A-313 Removable HDD Table 1.2.2-2 Additional Options after Shipping (MG3710A) Option No.
  • Page 30 Chapter 1 Outline Table 1.2.2-3 Warranty Period Extension Options (MG3710A) Option No. Product Name Remarks MG3710A-ES210 Extended 2-year warranty service MG3710A-ES310 Extended 3-year warranty service MG3710A-ES510 Extended 5-year warranty service Table 1.2.2-4 Additional Options at Shipping (MG3740A) Option No. Product Name...
  • Page 31 Product Configuration Table 1.2.2-5 Additional Options after Shipping (MG3740A) Option No. Product Name Remarks MG3740A-101 Rubidium Reference Oscillator Retrofit ±1 × 10 /month MG3740A-102 High Stability Reference Oscillator Retrofit ±1 × 10 /year MG3740A-111 2ndary HDD Retrofit MG3740A-117 Universal Input/Output Retrofit MG3740A-120 Digital Modulation Retrofit MG3740A-121...

  • Page 32: Applicable Parts

    Chapter 1 Outline 1.2.3 Applicable parts Table 1.2.3-1 lists the applicable parts for MG3710A/MG3740A. They are all sold separately. Table 1.2.3-1 Applicable Parts Model/Symbol Product Name Remarks W3580AE MG3710A Vector Signal Generator Printed version MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual (Mainframe)
  • Page 33 Product Configuration Table 1.2.3-1 Applicable Parts (Continued) Model/Symbol Product Name Remarks B0635A Rack mount kit (EIA) B0657A Rack mount kit (JIS) B0636A Carrying case (hard type) With casters B0645A Soft carrying case MA24106A USB Power Sensor (50 MHz to 6 GHz, With USB/Mini B cable) MA24118A USB Power Sensor...

  • Page 34: Application Software

    Chapter 1 Outline 1.2.4 Application software For the latest information on the application software, either visit the MG3710A/MG3740A page on the Anritsu website or contact an Anritsu sales representative. Application software is sold separately. Anritsu homepage: http://www.anritsu.com/ Table 1.2.4-1 lists examples of application software that are available for the MG3710A.

  • Page 35: Chapter 2 Preparation

    Chapter 2 Preparation This section describes items that you should know before using the MG3710A/MG3740A. Be sure to read this section at least once as it contains safety tips and cautions for avoiding equipment failure during use. Installation Location ............2-2 2.1.1 Installation orientation........

  • Page 36: Installation Location

    Chapter 2 Preparation 2.1 Installation Location 2.1.1 Installation orientation Set the MG3710A/MG3740A horizontally as shown in the figure below. Good No Good Figure 2.1.1-1 Installation Orientation CAUTION If the MG3710A/MG3740A is not installed in a “good” direction as above, a small shock may turn it over and...

  • Page 37: Distance From Surrounding Objects

    Installation Location 2.1.2 Distance from surrounding objects A fan is installed at the back of the MG3710A/MG3740A to prevent the internal temperature from rising. When installing the MG3710A/ MG3740A, be sure to keep its sides at a distance of 10 cm or more from surrounding objects such as walls and peripheral units, to secure sufficient space around the fan.

  • Page 38: Items To Check Before Use

    2.2.2 Reverse power The maximum reverse power input of the RF output connector of the MG3710A/MG3740A is as follows for both 1st RF and 2nd RF. Be careful not to apply reverse input power which exceeds the following. DC input ±50 V DC Max...

  • Page 39: Electrostatic

    Items to Check Before Use 2.2.3 Electrostatic CAUTION 1 Always use the supplied 3-pin power cord to ground both the mainframe and DUT (included in test circuit). After confirming that both the mainframe and DUT are grounded, use coaxial cables to connect them. NEVER connect the mainframe and DUT without grounding, otherwise electrostatic discharge may damage the mainframe.
  • Page 40 Chapter 2 Preparation CAUTION Do not touch the core conductor to the metal when connecting the coaxial cable to the connector. Doing so may damage the input circuit of the mainframe. CAUTION Do not touch the core conductor to the metal when connecting the coaxial cable to the connector.
  • Page 41 Items to Check Before Use...

  • Page 42: Power Connection

    Chapter 2 Preparation 2.3 Power Connection This section describes the procedures for supplying power. 2.3.1 Power requirements For normal operation of the instrument, observe the power voltage range described below. Power supply Voltage range Frequency 100 Vac system 100 to 120 V 50 to 60 Hz 200 Vac system 200 to 240 V...

  • Page 43: Connecting Power Cord

    Power Connection 2.3.2 Connecting power cord Insert the power plug into a grounded outlet, and connect the other end to the power inlet on the rear panel. To ensure that the instrument is properly grounded, always use the supplied 3-pin power cord. G round terminal G round Pin Plug...
  • Page 44 Chapter 2 Preparation CAUTION If an emergency arises causing the instrument to fail or malfunction, disconnect the instrument from the power supply by disconnecting either end of the power cord. When installing the instrument, arrange the power inlet and outlet so that an operator may easily connect or disconnect the power cord.

  • Page 45: Chapter 3 Operation

    Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes information you should know to operate the MG3710A/MG3740A, including names of parts and how to set basic parameters. Note on remote command: When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions.

  • Page 46: Part Names

    Chapter ３ Operation 3.1 Part Names 3.1.1 Front panel This section describes the front-panel keys and connectors. Figure 3.1.1-1 Front Panel Power switch Press to switch between the standby state (AC power supplied) and power-on state. The Power lamp lights orange at Standby and green at Power On.
  • Page 47 Part Names Remote lamp/Local key Lights when in remote-control state Remote lamp Press to reset the remote-control state with Local key GPIB, Ethernet, or USB (B) to the local-control state and enable the panel setting. Preset key Press to display the Preset menu. Resets parameters to initial settings Function keys Selects or configures function menu displayed on the right of the...
  • Page 48 Chapter ３ Operation Press to set items of AM modulation. Press to set items of FM/φM modulation. Press to set items of Pulse modulation. Press to set items of I/Q signals. Press to recall the Load function of ARB/Waveform function menu. Press to recall the Select function of ARB/Waveform function menu.
  • Page 49 Part Names Press to set a resolution for each parameter. Context：Behaves same as right-click. Windows：Behaves same as pressing Windows key. Rotary knob Rotate the knob to select an item or change a setting. Spin faster to increase the amount of change. I Input connector Inputs signals of I-phase when executing vector modulation of external baseband signals.
  • Page 50 Chapter ３ Operation USB connector (type A) Connect the accessory USB keyboard, mouse or USB memory.

  • Page 51: Rear Panel

    Part Names 3.1.2 Rear panel This section describes the rear-panel connectors. 13 14 Figure 3.1.2-1 Rear Panel Local Input connector Outputs external local signal. This connector cannot be used in MG3740A. Local Output connector Outputs Local signal. This connector cannot be used in MG3740A. Baseband Reference Clock Input connector Inputs clock signals that is the reference values for sampling clocks of the internal arbitrary waveform generator.
  • Page 52 Inputs external reference frequency signal (5 MHz/10 MHz/13 MHz). It is for inputting reference frequency signals with higher accuracy than the instrument's internal reference signal, or for synchronizing the frequency of the MG3710A/MG3740A to that of other equipment. Buffer Output connector (reference frequency signal output connector) Outputs the internal reference frequency signal (10 MHz).
  • Page 53 Part Names Marker1 Output connector Outputs Marker signal. The setting of output signals is based on the Table 7.4.2-1 “Output Connectors Function Menu”. Pattern Trigger1 Input connector Inputs external signals to be used for trigger signals. The setting of input signals is based on the Table 7.4.1-1 “Input Connector Function Menu”.
  • Page 54 Chapter ３ Operation AC inlet Supplies power. HDD slot This is a hard disk slot. HDD(Opt) HDD slot for options This is a hard disk slot for the options. External Modulation Input SG1 connector This is an option connector for additional analog modulation input for the SG1.
  • Page 55 Part Names Table 3.1.2-1 AUX Connectors Function Terminal In/Out Signal Name Pattern Status1 * Pattern Trigger3/Pattern Status3 * Pulse Video Pulse Sync Sync Trigger Out Marker 2 Marker 3 Pattern Trigger2/Pattern Status2 * Pulse Mod * BER CLK * BER Enable * BER Data * Because terminals not included in Table 3.1.2-1 are interfaces for maintaining equipment, do not connect them to any.

  • Page 56: Power On/Off

    (orange) goes off. When the power turns on, Windows starts, and then the software of the MG3710A/MG3740A starts. While it is starting, the start screen below is displayed. Do not press the power switch when the start screen is displayed.

  • Page 57: Power Off

    Do not press the power switch for more than 4 seconds. If you do so, a forced-end is performed when exiting the software. To use the mouse connected to the MG3710A/MG3740A to turn the power off: Connect the provided mouse to the MG3710A/MG3740A, and open the Start menu on the Windows task bar.
  • Page 58 Chapter ３ Operation Restoring parameters After the power on, parameters are restored to the state of the last time the power was off or the state of defaults setting. 3-14...

  • Page 59: Screen Layout

    Screen Layout 3.3 Screen Layout After the power turns on and Self Check completes, the basic screen (Figure 3.3-1) is displayed. 1SG: Title Common indicator Frequency Active function Level frame frame information frame information Resident frame Footer frame Function menu frame Function display Figure 3.3-1 Basic Screen (1SG) Title frame...
  • Page 60 Chapter ３ Operation Function display frame Displays the current setting of SG in a block diagram and displays necessary information for each function. Resident frame Displays Power Meter and measured results of BER. Footer frame Displays error messages, error information, and the current time. Function menu frame The function menu frame on the right-side of the screen displays the function menu.

  • Page 61: Common Indicator Frame

    Screen Layout 3.3.1 Common indicator frame The common indicator frame displays indicators described in Table 3.3.1-1 and Table 3.3.1-2 to indicate the current status. Table 3.3.1-1 Common Indicators Alarm Information Indicator Display Description Alarm information May be displayed even when there is no error. Indicates that the output level may not have been reached a certain value.
  • Page 62 Chapter ３ Operation ALC Alarm Remote command Query the status of ALC Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:ALC:ERRor? Response <status> Parameter Status <status> Alarm ALAR Normal NORM Programming Example To query the status of ALC. POW:ALC:ERR? > NORM BBDAC Alarm Remote command Query the status of BBDAC Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:DAC:ERRor? Response...
  • Page 63 Screen Layout UNLOCK Alarm Remote command UNLOCK: Query the status of Baseband Reference Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:CLOCk:REFerence:ERRor? Response <status> Parameter Status <status> Lock BB Int Clock LINT Unlock BB Int Clock UINT Lock BB Ext Clock LEXT Unlock BB Ext Clock UEXT Programming Example To query the status of Baseband Reference.
  • Page 64 Chapter ３ Operation EXTMOD Alarm Remote command EXTMOD: Check the external modulation input for “clipping” caused by overflow. Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:EXTMod:ERRor? Response NORM (Normal) or CLIP (Clipping) <boolean> Programming Example To check the external modulation input for “clipping” caused by overflow. EXTM:ERR? >...
  • Page 65 Screen Layout Table 3.3.1-2 Common Indicator Status Information Status information Indicates that the ARB function is being used. SWEEP Indicates that the SWEEP function is being used. Indicates AM modulation is being executed. Indicates FM modulation is being executed. Indicates φM modulation is being φΜ...

  • Page 66: Frequency Information Frame

    Chapter ３ Operation 3.3.2 Frequency information frame The frequency information frame displays the information of frequencies. There are two modes: frequency display and channel display. Refer to Chapter 4 “Frequency”. Figure 3.3.2-1 Frequency Information Frame (Frequency Display) Figure 3.3.2-2 Frequency Information Frame (Channel Display) 3.3.3 Level information frame The level information frame displays the information of levels.

  • Page 67: Active Function Frame

    Screen Layout 3.3.4 Active function frame On the active function frame, you can enter numbers and characters for setting all parameters. When you select a parameter on the function menu, a dialog box is displayed. This frame is not displayed when there is no parameter to be set or when it is in the remote-control state.
  • Page 68 Chapter ３ Operation Displays available characters. The character selection cursor and the mouse can be used for input. Refer to 3.5.2 “Setting character strings”. Note: Character types available for file names and for names other than file names are different. 3-24...

  • Page 69: Function Display Frame

    This is not displayed in the remote-control state. Figure 3.3.5-1 Function Display Frame Example Hardware Block Chart Displays the setting of the MG3710A/MG3740A, signal flow, and the current I/O setting status. ARB Info Shows the current waveform output status.
  • Page 70 Chapter ３ Operation Table 3.3.5-1 Keys Available for Creating and Editing Lists and Tables Key name Function Rotary knob Clockwise Moves the cursor from the left top to the right bottom sequentially. Counter clockwise Moves the cursor in reverse to the above. Moves the cursor horizontally.

  • Page 71: Resident Frame

    Screen Layout 3.3.6 Resident frame The resident frame displays parameters of ARB, Power Meter, BER setting, and measured results. Figure 3.3.6-1 Resident Frame ARB (Refer to Table 7.1.1-2 “Resident Display Frame ARB”.) ARB On/Off information Displays the combination of the waveform memory, CW, AWGN, and others output from ARB.

  • Page 72: Footer Frame

    Chapter ３ Operation 3.3.7 Footer frame The footer frame displays reasons and time of error messages or error information of indicators. Figure 3.3.7-1 Footer Frame Displays the error message ID. Displays the error message. (Ex: Data out of range) Displays the error information (cause of the error). (Ex: Setting value out of range) Displays the current time.

  • Page 73: Function Menu Frame

    Screen Layout 3.3.8 Function menu frame The function menu frame is displayed on the right side of the screen and contains the following items. Items on the menu depend on the screen. Displays the current function Function menu menu name. name Others Press to open the top function...
  • Page 74 Chapter ３ Operation • Function key without a symbol. There are 2 types. The function key with multiple options: Each time you press the function key, the underline of option moves in the function menu. Figure 3.3.8-3 Function Key without a Symbol The function key to execute operation immediately: Press the soft function key to execute the menu immediately.

  • Page 75: Display Of 2Sg

    Screen Layout 3.3.9 Display of 2SG When two SGs are installed, SG that is not selected for control is displayed in the summary frame as below. The figure below shows the summary frame when SG2 is not selected. Figure 3.3.9-1 Summary Frame Displayed frequency Displays the specified frequency.

  • Page 76: Rpp

    Figure 3.3.10-1 RPP Message RPP (Reverse Power Protection) is a function to protect the internal circuit of the MG3710A/MG3740A against the reverse input signals. When the external high level RF signal is input to the RF Output terminal, the excessive reverse input is blocked by the relay circuit to prevent from being input to the MG3710A/MG3740A.
  • Page 77 Screen Layout Remote command Query RPP Status Query :OUTPut[1]|2:PROTection:ERRor? Response <boolean> Parameter <boolean> RPP Status RPP does not block signals. RPP blocks signals. Programming Example To query RPP Status of SG1. OUTP:PROT:ERR? > 1 Remote command Query the count of RPP Query :OUTPut[1]|2:PROTection:COUNt? Response...

  • Page 78: Top Function Menu

    Chapter ３ Operation 3.4 Top Function Menu Press to display the top function menu. Table 3.4-1 Top Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Display Function Displays the Frequency function menu. Frequency Refer to Chapter 4 “Frequency” Displays the Level function menu. Level Refer to Chapter 5 “Level”...

  • Page 79: Modulation

    Top Function Menu 3.4.1 Modulation or Top > Modulation Turns On/Off the RF signal modulation . Press F6 Modulation to set the SG output signal modulation to On/Off. This behaves same as Mod On/Off on the front panel. Turns the modulation of SG output signals Off (no modulation, Default).

  • Page 80: Rf Output

    Chapter ３ Operation 3.4.2 RF Output or Top > RF Output Enables/disables the RF signal output. Press F7 RF Output to turn the output of SG signals On/Off. When RF Output is On, the SG On/Off LED (yellow) on the front panel and "RF" display of the output status (yellow) in the level information frame light.

  • Page 81: Sg Port

    Top Function Menu 3.4.3 SG Port or Top > SG Port Selects the SG to be controlled. Press F8 SG Port to select SG to be controlled. This is available when SG2 (Option 062/162, 064/164, 066/166) is installed. These behave same as SG1 and SG2 on the front panel.

  • Page 82: Common Setting Operations

    The touch panel or the numeric keypad can be used for numeric input. To input a numeric value using the touch panel: The display of the MG3710A/MG3740A is a touch panel. Press the arrow key on the upper right of the numeric input dialog box to display the numeric keypad panel.
  • Page 83 Common Setting Operations To input a numeric value using the numeric keypad: When you enter a numeric value using the numeric keypad, the value you entered is displayed in the text box. After inputting a numeric value, press the Enter , Enter Item , or unit key on the function menu to finalize it. When you press Cancel during the input process, the entered value becomes invalid and returns to the state before your input.

  • Page 84: Setting Character Strings

    Chapter ３ Operation 3.5.2 Setting character strings When you set a character string, the active function frame displays a dialog box to input character strings. When you enter Group Name, the Group Name dialog box is displayed. Figure 3.5.2-1 Character String Input Dialog Box A text box for character string input is displayed in the upper part of the dialog box, while the character pallet containing available characters is displayed in the lower part.
  • Page 85 Common Setting Operations Keys available for character string input are as follows: Table 3.5.2-2 Keys Available for Character String Input Key name Function Rotary knob Moves character string input pallet/panel character selection cursor horizontally Arrow keys, Moves character string input text box input cursor horizontally Numeric keypad Directly inputs numbers (from 0 to 9), “.”, and “-”.

  • Page 86: Setting File Names

    When you input a file name, an extension is automatically added. You cannot specify an extension. The maximum 100 characters are allowed for a file name. Example of a destination path: Anritsu¥MG3710A¥User Data¥XXXXX¥ Example of a default destination name: XXXXXX_[Date]_[Additional number].xxx The additional number will be the minimum three-digit numerical number within 000 to 999 which does not exist.
  • Page 87 Common Setting Operations Characters available for file names are displayed on the character palette. The following characters cannot be used: ¥ / : * ? “ ” ‘ ’ < > | A space or dot “.” at the beginning or the end of a file name causes a file name error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 88 Chapter ３ Operation 3-44.

  • Page 89: Chapter 4 Frequency

    Chapter 4 Frequency This chapter describes the functions for setting frequencies. Note on remote command: When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions. Refer to Appendix E, 7.6 “Selecting SG1/2” for details. Frequency ..............

  • Page 90: Frequency

    The Frequency function menu is displayed, too. This chapter assumes that you press Frequency or F1 Frequency on the top function menu and the MG3710A/MG3740A is in the frequency setting mode, unless otherwise specified. Frequency setting range and resolution...

  • Page 91: Display Description

    Frequency 4.1.1 Display description This section describes screens of the frequency information frame. Frequency display mode: Display frequency Frequency indicator RF output frequency Channel display mode: Channel group Display channel Channel RF output number frequency frequency Figure 4.1.1-1 Frequency Setting Screen Table 4.1.1-1 Items of Frequency Setting Screen Display Description...

  • Page 92: Frequency Indicator

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.1.2 Frequency indicator Items of frequency indicators are as follows: Table 4.1.2-1 Frequency Indicator Display Name Description Indicates that the frequency offset Offset function is on. Indicates that the frequency relative Reference value display function is on. Indicates that the frequency offset Multiplier multiplier function is on.
  • Page 93 Frequency Out of specified range: OSYNC Remote command OSYNC: Query the status of frequency synchronization for SG 1 and Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:SYNC:STATus? Response <status> Parameter Synchronization of frequencies <status> Out of Cannot synchronize frequencies because it Sync stands out of the specified range. Normal Normal NORM...

  • Page 94: Frequency Setting Method: Frequency

    Top > Frequency When you press Frequency of the main function key or F1 Frequency on the top function menu, the MG3710A/MG3740A becomes the frequency setting mode and the Frequency dialog box is displayed in the active function frame. Enter numbers in the Frequency dialog box to set frequencies.

  • Page 95: Frequency Setting

    Frequency Setting Method: Frequency 4.2.1 Frequency setting Enter numbers in the Frequency dialog box. with numeric keypad Setting method The procedure for setting frequencies with the numeric keypad is as follows. Example: To set the frequency to 360.3 MHz Press “ 3 ”, “ 6 ”, “ 0 ”, “ . ”, and “ 3 ” using number buttons of the numeric keypad or numbers on the screen.

  • Page 96: Changing Frequencies With Rotary Knob

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.2.2 Changing frequencies with rotary knob The rotary knob allows you to increase or decrease a digit of resolution selected by arrow keys . The cursor shows the position of the digit. Default value of the digit of resolution (the position of the cursor): 0.01 Setting method The procedure for setting frequencies with the rotary knob is as follows:...

  • Page 97: Changing Frequencies With Arrow Keys

    Frequency Setting Method: Frequency 4.2.3 Changing frequencies with arrow keys Arrow keys enable you to increase or decrease a digit of resolution selected by arrow keys . The cursor shows the position of the digit. Default value of frequency step: 100 kHz Setting method The procedure for setting frequencies with the arrow keys is as follows:...

  • Page 98: Frequency Setting Resolution

    Sets a resolution of arrow keys for setting frequencies. When the MG3710A/MG3740A is in the frequency setting mode, press Incr Set of the main function key to display the Increment dialog box. Enter numbers in the Increment dialog box to specify a resolution of...
  • Page 99 Frequency Setting Method: Frequency Set the numeric value “9” to set the step frequency to 9 kHz. Figure 4.2.4-1 Increment Dialog Box Press the unit key “kHz” of the function key to set the step frequency to 9 kHz. Figure 4.2.4-2 Increment Dialog Box Use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the frequency by 9 kHz step.

  • Page 100: Frequency Setting Items

    Top > Frequency When you press Frequency of the main function key or F1 Frequency on the main function menu, the MG3710A/MG3740A becomes the frequency setting mode and the Frequency function menu is displayed. Table 4.3-1 Frequency Function Menu Page Key No.
  • Page 101 LO Source This is not available in MG3740A. Int Ext/Sync Refer to 4.6.5 “Local signal source”. Adjusts the phase of a local signal. This is available when the MG3710A-017/117 is LO Out installed. Off On This is not available in MG3740A.

  • Page 102: Frequency Relative Display

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.3.1 Frequency relative display or Top > Frequency, > Freq Ref : Freq Ref Enables/disables the frequency relative display. The frequency relative display shows a difference from the reference output frequency. When you turn the frequency relative display from Off to On, a difference from 0 Hz, which is the reference frequency, is displayed.
  • Page 103 Frequency Setting Items Programming Example To enable the frequency relative display. FREQ:REF:STAT ON FREQ:REF:STAT? > 1 4-15...

  • Page 104: Frequency Offset

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.3.2 Frequency offset Freq Offset or Top > Frequency， > Freq Offset Enables/disables the frequency offset. When the frequency offset is on, the frequency offset value specified with F3 Offset Value is added to the display frequency, and the actual output frequency is displayed above it.
  • Page 105 Frequency Setting Items Frequency Offset Value: Offset Value or Top > Frequency， > Offset Value Sets the frequency offset value. Press F3 Offset Value to set a frequency offset value in the Offset Value dialog box in the active function frame. Setting range –200 GHz to 200 GHz Resolution...

  • Page 106: Frequency Offset Multiplier

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.3.3 Frequency offset multiplier Frequency offset multiplier: Freq Multiplier or Top > Frequency, > Freq Multiplier Sets a frequency offset multiplier. When this function is on, the actual output frequency is multiplied by a frequency offset multiplier and the result is displayed. Above the result, the actual output frequency is displayed.
  • Page 107 Frequency Setting Items Programming Example To enable the frequency offset multiplier. FREQ:MULT:STAT 1 FREQ:MULT:STAT? > 1 Frequency offset multiplier: Multiplier Value or Top > Frequency, > Multiplier Value Sets the value of the frequency offset multiplier. Press F5 Multiplier Value to set a value in the Multiplier Value dialog box in the active function frame.

  • Page 108: Channel Setting

    Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings When you press Frequency of the main function key or F1 Frequency on the main function menu, the MG3710A/MG3740A becomes the frequency setting mode. When you press F7 Channel Settings on the Frequency function menu, the Channel Setting function menu is displayed and the MG3710A/MG3740A becomes the channel setting mode.

  • Page 109: Frequency/Channel Display: Display

    Channel Setting 4.4.1 Frequency/channel display: Display or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Display Selects either frequency or channel for inputting and displaying the RF frequency. Press F1 Display on the Channel Settings function menu to switch “Freq” and “Channel”. Freq Frequency display (Default) Channel...

  • Page 110: Frequency Display: Frequency

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.4.2 Frequency display: Frequency or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Frequency Displays/hides the frequency when a channel number is displayed on the screen. This function is available only in the channel setting mode. Press F2 Frequency on the Channel Settings function menu to toggle On/Off.

  • Page 111: Channel Selection: Channel

    Channel Setting 4.4.3 Channel selection: Channel or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Channel Sets a channel specified in the channel table. This function is available only in the channel setting mode. Press F3 Channel on the Channel Settings function menu to set a channel in the Channel dialog box in the active function frame.
  • Page 112 Chapter 4 Frequency next channel group. This rule, however, does not apply to the end channel number of the end channel group. If the rotary knob is turned counterclockwise or is pressed with the start channel number selected, the cursor moves to the end channel of the previous channel group.

  • Page 113: Channel Group

    Channel Setting 4.4.4 Channel Group or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Channel Group Sets a channel group specified in the channel table. This function is available only in the channel setting mode. Press F4 Channel Group on the Channel Settings function menu to display the Channel Group function menu and select Channel Group to be used.

  • Page 114: Channel Table: Edit Table

    Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Edit Table This function is available only in the channel setting mode. On the MG3710A/MG3740A, you can assign a channel number to any frequency. In addition, channels with a certain frequency interval can be registered as a channel group.
  • Page 115 Channel Table: Edit Table Table 4.5-2 Channel Table Edit Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Display Function Displays input dialog boxes for items selected by the cursor in the Channel Table of the active function Edit Item frame where you can enter appropriate numbers. Refer to 4.5.1 “Registering channel groups”.

  • Page 116: Registering Channel Groups

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.5.1 Registering channel groups or Top > Frequency , > Channel Settings > Edit Table Registers channel groups for setting channels. Remote command Register channel groups Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:CHANnels:EDIT <ext_integer1>,<string>,<ext_integer2>,<ext_integer3>,<f req1>,<freq2> Parameter Group Number <ext_integer1> Setting range 1 to 19 Default Group Name <string>...
  • Page 117 Channel Table: Edit Table Programming Example To set Group Number 03: Group Name 802.11b, Start Channel 1, End Channel 13, Start Freq. 2.412 GHz, and Channel Space 5 MHz. FREQ:CHAN:EDIT 3,”802.11b”,1,13,2.412GHZ,5MHZ Setting method The procedure for registering channel groups is as follows: Example: To create a channel group on the fifth row of the channel table under the following condition: •...
  • Page 118 Chapter 4 Frequency The following restrictions apply to group names with long character strings: Channel Setting，Channel Group Function Menus If the display range is exceeded, the display is zoomed-out. If the display range is still exceeded after zooming-out, the out-of-range parts are omitted.
  • Page 119 Channel Table: Edit Table Use the numeric keypad to enter “13” in the End Number dialog box. Press F1 Enter Item to set the End channel in the Channel Table and close the End Number dialog box. Note: The channel setting ranges 0 to 20000. The End channel, however, must be set to a number same as or more than the Start channel.
  • Page 120 Chapter 4 Frequency Place the cursor on the “Channel Spacing” of the first row. Press F1 Edit Item to display the Channel Spacing dialog box in the active function frame. Settable range 1 Hz to 999.999999 MHz Resolution 1 Hz Default 16 kHz Use the numeric keypad to enter “5”...

  • Page 121: Adding Channel Groups: Insert Row

    Channel Table: Edit Table 4.5.2 Adding channel groups: Insert Row or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Edit Table > Insert Row Adds a row to create a channel group. Use the following procedure to add a row using F2 Insert Row . •...

  • Page 122: Deleting Channel Groups: Delete Row

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.5.3 Deleting channel groups: Delete Row or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Edit Table > Delete Row Deletes the selected channel group. Use the cursor to select a group to delete, and press F3 Delete Row to delete it.

  • Page 123: Deleting Channel Tables: Clear

    Channel Table: Edit Table 4.5.4 Deleting channel tables: Clear or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Edit Table > Clear Press F4 Clear to delete all data in the channel table. Remote command Delete a channel table Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:CHANnels:DELete:ALL Programming Example To delete all data of the channel table.

  • Page 124: Recalling Channel Tables: Open

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.5.5 Recalling channel tables: Open or Top > Frequency, > Channel Settings > Edit Table > Open Recalls the saved channel table file. Remote command Recalls a channel table file Command :MMEMory[1]|2:LOAD:FREQuency:CHANnels <string>[,<device>] Parameter File name without an extension <string>...
  • Page 125 Channel Table: Edit Table Figure 4.5.5-1 Channel Table Recall Dialog Box Use the rotary knob or arrow keys to select a channel table file to recall. Press F7 Open to recall the selected channel table file. Press F8 Chancel to return to the previous screen without recall the channel table file.

  • Page 126: Saving Channel Tables: Save

    A destination path to save the file will be the following directory in the specified drive. Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\ChannelTable\ Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 127 Channel Table: Edit Table Press F8 Save to open the Save function menu. Table 4.5.6-1 Channel Table Save Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Drive Specifies a Drive where the channel table is saved. Change Focus Moves the cursor between dialog box and file list. Save Saves the channel table in the folder specified in Drive.
  • Page 128 Chapter 4 Frequency The maximum 100 characters are allowed for a file name. Destination path: Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\ChannelTable\ Default destination name: Channel_[Date]_[Additional number].ch The additional number will be the minimum three-digit numerical number within 000 to 999 which does not exist.

  • Page 129: Frequency-Related Functions

    4.6 Frequency-Related Functions When you press Frequency of the main function key or F1 Frequency on the main function menu, the MG3710A/MG3740A becomes the frequency setting mode. This section assumes that you press Frequency and the MG3710A/MG3740A is in the Frequency Setting mode, unless otherwise specified.
  • Page 130 0 or 1 <boolean> Parameter Frequency synchronization <boolean> OFF|0 Does not synchronize frequencies (Default) Synchronizes frequencies ON|1 Details This is available when the MG3710A/MG3740A-062/064/066/162/164/166 is installed. Programming Example To synchronize frequencies of SG1 and SG2. FREQ:SYNC ON FREQ:SYNC? > 1 4-42...
  • Page 131 1 or 0 <mode> Parameter Frequency synchronization <mode> Parallel mode (Default) PARallel SYMMetry Symmetry mode Details This is available when the MG3710A/MG3740A-062/064/066/162/164/166 is installed. Programming Example To set the frequency synchronization mode to Parallel. FREQ:SYNC:MODE PAR FREQ:SYNC:MODE? > PAR 4-43...

  • Page 132: Phase Noise Optimization: Phase Noise Optimize

    Chapter 4 Frequency 4.6.2 Phase noise optimization: Phase Noise Optimize or Top > Frequency, > > Phase Noise Opt. Switching a loop character of PLL synthesizer circuit allows you to select a character of phase noise between Close-in Phase and Wide-Offset Phase.

  • Page 133: Spectrum Reverse: Rf Spectrum

    Frequency-Related Functions 4.6.3 Spectrum reverse: RF Spectrum or Top > Frequency, > > RF Spectrum You can use the spectrum reverse function when reversed modulation signals must be input, for example evaluating DUT for IF. In MG3740A, you can use the spectrum reverse function only when option-020/120 is installed.
  • Page 134 Chapter 4 Frequency Normal Reverse Figure 4.6.3-1 RF Spectrum: Two Waves Not Added FreqOffset FreqOffset Normal Reverse Figure 4.6.3-2 RF Spectrum: Two Waves Added 4-46...

  • Page 135: Reference Oscillator

    Auto. The “EXTREF” is displayed in the frequency indicator when the external signal is used as the reference frequency source. Uses the internal frequency source of the MG3710A/MG3740A as the reference frequency source. Auto Uses the internal frequency source of the...
  • Page 136 Set a frequency of external reference signal for the MG3710A/MG3740A. When an external signal is used for a reference signal source, the frequency of the external signal must be set for the MG3710A/MG3740A. Press to switch the function menu to page 2.

  • Page 137: Local Signal Source

    Top > Frequency, > > LO Source Sets a Local signal source. This is available when the MG3710A-017/117 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. This is an independent parameter for each SG. It can be set when in the modulation output status (when either AM，FM, φΜ...
  • Page 138 Pulse modulation is On, or when the selected waveform setting is Mod=On). Note: When the MG3710A/MG3740A output signal EVM is to be measured, set LO Out to Off. If LO Out is set to On while the LO Out connector is opened, the MG3710A/MG3740A output signal EVM is degraded because of reflection.
  • Page 139 <boolean> Does not externally output Local signals OFF|0 (Default). Externally outputs Local signals. ON|1 Details This is available when the MG3710A-017/117 is installed. Programming Example To externally output Local signals. LOC:OUT ON LOC:OUT? > 1 Local phase adjustment: LO Phase or Top >...
  • Page 140 Chapter 4 Frequency Remote command Adjust a phase of Local signals Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:PHASe[:ADJust] <phase> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:PHASe[:ADJust]? Response <phase> Parameter Phase of Local signals <phase> Setting range –180.00 deg to 180.00 deg Resolution 0.01 Default Programming Example To set a phase of the Local signal to 4.25 deg. PHAS 4.25 PHAS? >...

  • Page 141: Ref Clock Adjustment

    Frequency-Related Functions 4.6.6 Ref Clock Adjustment or Top>Frequency, > >Ref Clock Adjustment Used for frequency calibration. For the calibration method, refer to 11.4 “Calibration”. Press to switch the function menu to page 2. Press F8 Ref Clock Adjustment to display the Freq Adjustment function menu and adjust frequencies of the internal reference frequency signals.
  • Page 142 Chapter 4 Frequency Remote command Set the adjustment value of the internal reference frequency signals Command :CALibration:RCLock[:VALue] <integer> Query :CALibration:RCLock[:VALue]? Response <integer> Parameter Adjustment value <integer> Setting range 0 to 1023 Resolution Default Factory shipment defaults Programming Example To set the adjustment value of the internal reference frequency signal to 511.

  • Page 143: Chapter 5 Output Level

    Chapter 5 Output Level This chapter describes the functions related to the level setting. Note on remote command: When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions. Refer to Appendix E, 7.6 “Selecting SG1/2”...

  • Page 144: Output Level

    MG3710A/MG3740A enters the output level setting mode and the Level dialog box is displayed in the active function frame. This section assumes that you press Level and the MG3710A/MG3740A is in the output level setting mode, unless otherwise specified.

  • Page 145: Display Description

    Output Level 5.1.1 Display description or Top > Level This section describes screens of the level information frame. Displayed output RF output level Output status level display Level indicator Figure 5.1.1-1 Output Level Setting Screen Table 5.1.1-1 Output Level Setting Screen Display Item Display Description Displayed output...
  • Page 146 Chapter ５ Output Level Example of Use To query the actual output level. POW:CURR? > 10.00...

  • Page 147: Level Indicator

    Output Level 5.1.2 Level indicator Shows the display items of the level indicator. Table 5.1.2-1 Level Indicator Display Name Description Level Offset Indicates the level offset function is On. Indicates the relative level display Reference function is On. Attenuator Hold Indicates the ATT Hold function is On.
  • Page 148 Chapter ５ Output Level Remote command Query the status of OSYNC Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:SYNC:ERRor? Response <status> Parameter Measurement status <status> Out of Sync: The level synchronization has been disabled. Normal: The level synchronization is enabled or NORM the synchronization setting is Off. Example of Use To query the current operation status.

  • Page 149: Output Level Setting Method: Level

    <ampl> Range Output level setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 dB Default Minimum output level of MG3710A/MG3740A Suffix code DBM, DM, DBUV, DBUVE DBM when omitted Example of Use To set the SG2 output level to –30.00 dBm. SOUR2:POW –30.00 SOUR2:POW? >...
  • Page 150 Unit: dB <rel_ampl> Parameter Relative output level <rel_ampl> Range Output level setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 dB Default Minimum output level of MG3710A/MG3740A Example of Use To set the relative output to +10.00 dB. POW:REF:AMPL 10.00DB POW:REF:AMPL? > 10.00...

  • Page 151: Output Level Setting With Numeric Keypad

    Output Level Setting Method: Level 5.2.1 Output level setting with numeric keypad Enter numbers in the Level dialog box. Setting method The procedure for setting output levels with the numeric keypad is as follows. Example: To set the output level to –47 dBm. Press “...

  • Page 152: Changing Output Level With Rotary Knob

    Chapter ５ Output Level 5.2.2 Changing output level with rotary knob The rotary knob allows you to increase or decrease a digit of resolution selected by arrow keys . The cursor shows the position of the digit. Setting method The procedure for setting the output level with the rotary knob is as follows.

  • Page 153: Changing Output Level With Arrow Keys

    Output Level Setting Method: Level 5.2.3 Changing output level with arrow keys Arrow keys enable you to increase or decrease a digit of resolution selected by arrow keys . The cursor shows the position of the digit. Default value of output level step: 0.1 dB Setting method The procedure for setting output level with the arrow keys is as follows.

  • Page 154: Output Level Setting Resolution

    Sets a resolution of arrow keys for setting the output level. When the MG3710A/MG3740A is in the output level setting mode, press Incr Set of the main function key to display the Increment dialog box. Enter numbers in the Increment dialog box to specify a resolution of...
  • Page 155 Output Level Setting Method: Level Set 0.3 dB. Figure 5.2.4-1 Increment Dialog Box Press F1 dB to set the level setting resolution and return to the Level dialog box. Use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the frequency by 0.3 dB step. 5-13...

  • Page 156: Output Level Setting Item

    Top > Level When you press Level of the main function key or F2 Level in the top function menu, the MG3710A/MG3740A enters the output level setting mode and the Level function menu is displayed. Table 5.3-1 Level Function Menu...
  • Page 157 Output Level Setting Item Table 5.3-1 Level Function Menu (Cont’d) Page Menu Display Function Starts the BER measurement. If MeasureStart is executed during measurement, the measurement is Start stopped once and restarted. It is displayed when the BER Measurement BER measurement function option is installed. Refer to Chapter 8 “BER Measurement”.

  • Page 158: Relative Level Display: Reference

    Chapter ５ Output Level 5.3.1 Relative level display: Reference or Top > Level, > Reference Enables/disables the relative level display. The relative level display displays the output level difference from the reference output level. When you turn the relative level display from Off to On, a difference from 0 dB, which is the reference level of output level, is displayed.
  • Page 159 Range Output level setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 dB Default Minimum output level of MG3710A/MG3740A Example of Use To query the reference level for relative output level. POW:REF? > -5.00 Setting method The relative level setting procedure is as follows.
  • Page 160 Chapter ５ Output Level Set the relative level to 7.5 dB. At this time the displayed level is also “7.50 dB”, however, the actual level output from SG is –47 dBm + 7.5 dB = –39.5 dBm as the RF output level. 5-18...

  • Page 161: Level Offset: Offset

    LevelOffsetValue. This function is used when the path loss or gain from SG to DUT is corrected. Output level after offset = RF output level + offset level This level is displayed MG3710A/MG3740A on the screen. Cable (Attenuation: 1.7 dB)
  • Page 162 Chapter ５ Output Level Output level offset On/Off <boolean> Off (Default) OFF|0 ON|1 Example of Use To set the output level offset to ON. POW:OFFS:STAT ON POW:OFFS:STAT? > 1 Offset level: Offset Value or Top > Level, > Offset Value Sets the output offset level.
  • Page 163 Output Level Setting Item Setting method The output offset level setting procedure is as follows. Example: To set for the offset level to be –1.7 dB and output level after offset to be –47 dBm. Press F3 Offset Value to display the Offset Value dialog box in the active function frame.

  • Page 164: Output Level Limit

    Chapter ５ Output Level 5.3.3 Output level limit Output level limit: Limit Level or Top > Level, > Limit Level Enables/disables the Limit Level function to limit the output level. Press F4 Limit Level to set the Limit Level function to On/Off. Selecting “On”...
  • Page 165 Setting range RFLevelMin + LevelOffset + UnitCoef to RFLevelMax + LevelOffset + UnitCoef (with the output level display) RFLevelMax: Maximum output level of MG3710A/MG3740A RFLevelMin: Minimum output level of MG3710A/MG3740A LevelOffset: Offset level The UnitCoef value is as follows: When LevelUnit is dBm: UnitCoef = 0 When LevelUnit is dBV (Term): UnitCoef =...
  • Page 166 Chapter ５ Output Level Example of Use To set the Limit Level to 30 dBm. POW:USER:MAX 30 POW:USER:MAX? > 30.00 Setting method The Limit Level setting procedure is as follows. Example: To set the Limit Level to 10 dBm. Press F5 Limit Value to display the Limit Value dialog box in the active function frame.

  • Page 167: Att Hold

    Output Level Setting Item 5.3.4 ATT Hold or Top > Level, > ATT Hold Enables/disables the ATT Hold function to prevent the signal dropout on ATT switching. Press F7 ATT Hold to set the ATT Hold function to On. Sets the ATT Hold function to Off(Default). Signal dropouts occur on ATT switching.
  • Page 168 Chapter ５ Output Level Parameter On/Off status of ATT Hold function <boolean> Off (Default) OFF|0 ON|1 Example of Use To set the ATT Hold function to ON. POW:ATT:AUTO ON POW:ATT:AUTO? > 1 5-26...

  • Page 169: Level Synchronization: Sync

    Enables/disables the function to synchronize the 1st SG with 2nd SG output level settings. It is used when the levels of SG1 and SG2 are to be changed simultaneously. This is available when the MG3710A/MG3740A-062/162/064/164/ 066/166 is installed. Press F8 Sync to set the level synchronization function to On.

  • Page 170: Calibrate Level

    ALC loop circuit. However, when the modulation is set to On, the ALC loop circuit is held and becomes nonfunctional. If the MG3710A/MG3740A is used with the same setting for a long period, level calibration is recommended to eliminate fluctuations with temperature drift.

  • Page 171: Optimize S/N

    Output Level Setting Item 5.3.7 Optimize S/N or Top > Level, > > Optimize S/N The function to improve the S/N of CW signals. When it is set to On, CW is output with S/N priority. When it is set to Off, CW is output with distortion characteristic priority.

  • Page 172: User Correction: Correction

    SG to DUT. Output level after correction = RF output level + correction level This level will be MG3710A/MG3740A displayed. Cable (Attenuation: 1.7 dB) Output level after correction...
  • Page 173 User Correction: Correction to switch the function menu to the second page, and press F1 Press Correction to set the user correction function to On. Sets the user correction function to Off. (Default) Sets the user correction set with F2 Configure Correction to On.

  • Page 174: User Correction Setting: Configure Correction

    To set the user correction value, you can set the correction value measured in advance to the Correction Table or measure the correction value with the power sensor connected to the MG3710A/MG3740A to create the correction table. Selecting the item to be set with the cursor on the Table and pressing F1 Edit Item displays the dialog box for setting.
  • Page 175 User Correction: Correction Table 5.4.1-1 Correction Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Sets the user correction table correction value. Edit Item Refer to 5.4.2 “Edit Item”. Adds the correction value to the user correction table. Insert Row Refer to 5.4.3 “Adding correction data: Insert Row”. Deletes the correction value in the user correction table.

  • Page 176: Edit Item

    Add the correction value to the correction table Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:CORRection:FLATness:PAIR <freq>,<rel_ampl> Parameter Frequency <freq> Setting range Frequency setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 Hz Default 1 GHz Suffix code HZ, KHZ, MHZ, GHZ, KZ, MZ, GZ Handled as HZ when omitted.
  • Page 177 User Correction: Correction Setting method The user correction value setting procedure is as follows. Example: To create a user correction table under the following conditions.  Frequency: 2.412 GHz  Correction value: 3 dB Setting the frequency Figure 5.4.2-1 Frequency Setting Align the cursor with row 1 and press F2 Insert Row to copy only the frequency and add a new input row under the cursor row.
  • Page 178 Chapter ５ Output Level Enter “2.412” of frequency to the Frequency dialog box. Press the unit F1 GHz on the function menu to set a frequency and close the Correction Table dialog box. At this time the order of user correction tables changes in the order of frequencies.

  • Page 179: Adding Correction Data: Insert Row

    User Correction: Correction 5.4.3 Adding correction data: Insert Row or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Insert Row Inserts a row to add the correction value to the correction table. Press F2 Insert Row at the User Correction function menu to copy only the frequency and add a correction data setting row at the row under the Correction Table cursor row.

  • Page 180: Deleting Correction Data: Delete Row

    Chapter ５ Output Level 5.4.4 Deleting correction data: Delete Row or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Delete Row One row of the correction value of the correction table expanded in the memory is deleted. Press F3 Delete Row at the User Correction function menu to delete the correction data of the Correction Table cursor row.

  • Page 181: Deleting Correction Table: Clear

    User Correction: Correction 5.4.5 Deleting correction table: Clear or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Clear Deletes all of the correction table expanded in the memory. Remote command Delete all of the correction table Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:CORRection:FLATness:PRESet Example of Use To delete all of the correction table.

  • Page 182: Recalling User Correction Table: Open

    Chapter ５ Output Level 5.4.6 Recalling user correction table: Open or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Open Recalls the saved user correction table. Remote command Recall the user correction table Command :MMEMory [1]|2:LOAD:CORRection:FLATness <string>[,<device>] Parameter File name without an extension <string>...
  • Page 183 User Correction: Correction Figure 5.4.6-1 Correction Recall Dialog Box Use the rotary knob or arrow keys to select the user correction table file to recall. Press F7 Open to recall the selected user correction table file. Press F8 Cancel to return to the previous screen without recalling the channel table file.

  • Page 184: Saving User Correction Table: Save

    A destination path to save the file is the following directory in the specified drive. Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\Corrections\ Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 185 User Correction: Correction Setting method The user correction table saving procedure is as follows. Example: To name the user correction table currently displayed as “W-LAN” and save it. Press F8 Save to open the Correction Save function menu. Table 5.4.7-1 Correction Save Function Menu Page Menu Display Function...
  • Page 186 When you input a file name, an extension is automatically added. You cannot specify an extension. The maximum 100 characters are allowed for a file name. Destination path: Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\Corrections\ Default destination name: Corr[Date]_[Additional number].csv The additional number will be the minimum three-digit numerical number within 000 to 999 which does not exist.

  • Page 187: Use Power Sensor

    Use Power Sensor 5.5 Use Power Sensor or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor The power sensor to be used for the user correction is set. Press F5 Use Power Sensor in the Correction function menu to open the USB Power Sensor function menu.

  • Page 188: Connection Settings

    Chapter ５ Output Level 5.5.1 Connection Settings or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor > Connection Settings Press F1 Connection Settings in the Use Power Sensor function menu to open the PM Connection function menu. Table 5.5.1-1 PM Connection Function Menu Page Key No.
  • Page 189 If Windows Device Manager does not display the available USB power sensor, the older version of PowerXpert software may be the cause. Download and install the latest PowerXpert software from Anritsu website. Use PowerXpert Ver. 2.11 or later for MA24105A, use PowerXpert Ver.
  • Page 190 Chapter ５ Output Level Remote command Select the model name Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:CORRection:PMETer:MODel MA24104A|MA24105A|MA24106A|MA24108A|MA24118A|MA24126A Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:CORRection:PMETer:MODel? Response <model> Parameter Power sensor model name <model> Options MA24104A, MA24105A，MA24106A (Default), MA24108A, MA24118A, MA24126A Example of Use To select the MA24118A for the power sensor of SG1. CORR:PMET:MOD MA24118A CORR:PMET:MOD? >...

  • Page 191: Settings

    Use Power Sensor 5.5.2 Settings or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor > Settings Press F2 Settings in the Use Power Sensor function menu to open the Settings function menu. Table 5.5.2-1 Settings Function Menu Page Key No.
  • Page 192 Setting range See Table 5.5.2-2 Frequency Setting Range. Resolution 0.01 Hz Default 1 GHz Table 5.5.2-2 Frequency Setting Range Maximum Value Power Sensor Minimum Value MG3710A/MG3740A Options 032/062/162 034/064/164 036/066/166 MA24104A 600 MHz 2.7 GHz 4 GHz 4 GHz MA24105A 350 MHz 2.7 GHz...
  • Page 193 Use Power Sensor Example of Use To set the start frequency to 600 MHz. CORR:FLAT:STEP:STAR 600MHZ CORR:FLAT:STEP:STAR? > 600000000.00 Stop Freq or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor > Settings > Stop Freq Sets the stop frequency when the correction table is created with the power sensor.
  • Page 194 SG to DUT is corrected. Power sensor reading after offset = power sensor reading + offset level RF output level –45.3 dBm Power sensor MG3710A/ Path to be corrected MG3740A such as cables (Att:1.7 dB) Power sensor...
  • Page 195 Use Power Sensor Example of Use To set the level offset to ON. CORR:PMET:GAIN2:STAT ON CORR:PMET:GAIN2:STAT? > 1 Level Offset Value or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor > Settings > Level Offset Value Sets the offset level value to be added to the power sensor reading. Press F4 Level Offset Value in the Settings function menu to display the Level Offset Value dialog box in the active function frame.
  • Page 196 Chapter ５ Output Level Correction Points or Top>Level, > >Configure Correction>Use Power Sensor>Settings>Correction Points Sets the measurement point number when the correction table is created with the power sensor. The measurement point interval is by the following: (Start frequency – stop frequency) / (correction point – 1) Press F5 Correction Points in the Settings function menu to display the Correction Points dialog box in the active function frame.
  • Page 197 Use Power Sensor Averaging or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor > Settings > Averaging Enables/disables the averaging for the measurement value with the power sensor. Pressing F6 Averaging in the Setting function menu sets the averaging. Does not execute the averaging(Default).
  • Page 198 Chapter ５ Output Level Averaging Count or Top > Level， > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor > Settings > Averaging Count Sets the averaging count for the measurement values with the power sensor. Press F7 Averaging Count in the Settings function menu to display the Averaging count dialog box in the active function frame.

  • Page 199: Zero Adjustment: Zero Sensor

    Press F4 Zero Sensor in the Use Power Sensor function menu to execute the zero adjustment for the power sensor. “Zeroing the Sensor” is displayed and the output of the MG3710A/MG3740A is Off during the adjustment. Also keys other than the power key are disabled. CAUTION The power sensor may be damaged depending on the output level of the MG3710A/MG3740A.

  • Page 200: File

    Chapter ５ Output Level 5.5.4 Creating correction table: Create Correction File or Top > Level, > > Configure Correction > Use Power Sensor > Create Correction File This connects the PowerSensor and creates the Correction Table. The Correction Table cannot be created if it is not executed when a USB power sensor is connected.
  • Page 201 F1 Start Freq , F2 Stop Freq , and F5 Correction Points . Set the path loss/gain between the MG3710A/MG3740A and the power sensor to F4 Level Offset Value in the Settings function menu, and set F3 Level Offset to On. Set the output level of the MG3710A/MG3740A to the level of the test target.
  • Page 202 Chapter ５ Output Level Press F6 Create Correction File in the USB Power Sensor function menu to output the CW signal from the MG3710A/MG3740A and sweep frequency between Start Frequency and Stop Frequency. The signal is received by the power sensor, and the difference from the MG3710A/MG3740A output level is created as the correction table.

  • Page 203: Chapter 6 Sweep/List

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List This chapter describes the operations and screen display of the Sweep/List function. Note on remote command: When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions. Refer to Appendix E, 7.6 “Selecting SG1/2”...

  • Page 204: Sweep/List Function

    6.1 Sweep/List Function or Top > Sweep/List MG3710A/MG3740A has the Sweep function for frequencies and levels to be changed within the specified range and the List function for frequencies and levels to be changed according to the List created with setting values in advance.
  • Page 205 Sweep/List Function Figure 6.1.1-2 Sweep/List Info Dialog Box (Sweep Type : “List”) Table 6.1.1-1 Sweep/List Info Display Items type Display Description Sweep Sweep Indicates items, frequency (Freq), and level (Lvl) /List to execute the Sweep/List function. Sweep Type Distinguishes the Sweep function (Sweep) and List function (List).
  • Page 206 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Recalling sweep point being executed: Current Point This command recalls the sweep point being executed. Remote command Query the current sweep point Query [:SOURce]:SWEep:CPOint? [:SOURce]:LIST:CPOint? Response <point> Parameter Sweep point being executed <point> Programming Example To recall the sweep point being executed. SWE:CPO? >...

  • Page 207: Setting Item

    Setting Item 6.2 Setting Item The Sweep/List function menu is described below. Sweep/List function menu: Sweep/List Table 6.2.1-1 Sweep/List Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Display Function Opens the Sweep Mode function menu and sets the Sweep execution of Sweep/List function. Refer to 6.2.1 “Setting operation item: Sweep”.

  • Page 208: Setting Operation Item: Sweep

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.2.1 Setting operation item: Sweep or Top > Sweep/List, > Sweep Selects the items (frequency and level) to be executed with the setting parameters of the Sweep/List function. Press F1 Sweep to display the Sweep Mode function menu. The parameters to execute the Sweep/List function are set from the frequency and level.
  • Page 209 Setting Item Sweep/List function for frequency: Freq or Top > Sweep/List, > Sweep > Frequency The Sweep/List function for frequency is set. Press F2 Freq to set the Sweep/List function for frequency to On/Off. Executes Stops (Default) Remote command Enables/disables the Sweep/List function for frequency Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:MODE CW|FIXed|LIST Query...
  • Page 210 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Sweep/List function for level：Level or Top > Sweep/List, > Sweep > Level Sets the Sweep/List function for output level. Press F3 Level to set the Sweep/List function for output level to On/Off. Executes Stops (Default) Remote command Enables/disables the Sweep/List function for level Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:MODE FIXed|LIST...

  • Page 211: Sweep Type

    Setting Item 6.2.2 Sweep Type or Top > Sweep/List, > Sweep Type Selects the Sweep function or List function. Press F2 Sweep Type to select. Sweep Step Sweep function (Default) List List Sweep function Remote command Select the Sweep function or List function Command [:SOURce]:LIST:TYPE LIST|STEP Query...

  • Page 212: Sweep Repeat

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.2.3 Sweep Repeat or Top > Sweep/List, > Sweep Repeat Selects the operation count for the Sweep/List function from Continuous/Single. Press F3 Sweep Repeat to select. Cont Continuous (Default) Single Once (Single) Remote command Select the operation count for the Sweep/List function from Continuous/Single Command :INITiate:CONTinuous[:ALL] <boolean>...

  • Page 213: Sweep Direction

    Setting Item Remote command Execute the sweep operation Command :INITiate[:IMMediate][:ALL] [:SOURce]:TSWeep Programming Example To execute the sweep operation. INIT 6.2.5 Sweep Direction or Top > Sweep/List, > Sweep Direction Sets the execution order for Sweep/List function. Press F5 Sweep Direction to set. From the start to the stop for Sweep function, and from the first to the end for List function (Default)

  • Page 214: Manual Mode

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.2.6 Manual mode Sets the method to move to the next point on Sweep function and List function. Manual Mode or Top > Sweep/List, > > Manual Mode Enables/disables the Manual Mode on Sweep function and List function. Press F1 Manual Mode in the second page of the Sweep/List function menu to switch Sets the automatic movement to the next point...
  • Page 215 Setting Item Manual Point or Top > Sweep/List, > > Manual Point Sets the sweep point manually on Sweep function and List function. Press F2 Manual Point in the second page of the Sweep/List function menu to display the Manual Point dialog box in the active function frame. Set the Manual Point.

  • Page 216: Sweep Out

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.2.7 Sweep Out or Top > Sweep/List, > > Sweep Out Sets the signal (information) output from the SweepOut terminal. To use this function, the general purpose input/output option is required. This function is unavailable when Sweep/List Type is set to Sweep for SG2.
  • Page 217 Setting Item Remote command Select the SweepOut terminal output format Command :ROUTe[:CONNectors]:OUTPut:SOUT SWEep|SETTled Query :ROUTe[:CONNectors]:OUTPut:SOUT? Response SWE or SETT <mode> Parameter Output signal <mode> 10 V Sweep Signal SWEep Sweep Status (Default) SETTled Details To use this function, the general purpose input/output option 017/117 is required.

  • Page 218: Trigger Out Polarity

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.2.8 Trigger Out Polarity or Top > Sweep/List, > > Trigger Out Polarity Sets the polarity of Point Trigger Out signal. Note: For the output connector setting, refer to 7.4.2 “Route Output Connectors”. Press F5 Trigger Out Polarity in the second page of the Sweep/List function menu to set the polarity of Point Trigger Out signal.
  • Page 219 Setting Item Programming Example To set the signal polarity to negative. TRIG:OUTP:POL NEG TRIG:OUTP:POL? > NEG 6-17...

  • Page 220: Sweep Function

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.3 Sweep Function 6.3.1 Configure Step Sweep or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure Step Sweep Execute the settings to execute the Sweep function. Press F6 Configure Step Sweep in the Sweep/List function menu to display the Sweep function menu. Table 6.3.1-1 Sweep Function Menu Page Key No.
  • Page 221 Sets the start frequency of the Sweep function. Press F1 Freq Start to display the Freq Start dialog box in the active function frame. Set the start frequency. Range Same as the frequency setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 Hz Default 1 GHz Figure 6.3.1-1 Freq Start Dialog Box...
  • Page 222 Sweep function. Press F2 Freq Stop to display the Freq Stop dialog box in the active function frame. Set the stop frequency. Range Same as the frequency setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A. Resolution 0.01 Hz Default 1 GHz Figure 6.3.1-2 Freq Stop Dialog Box...
  • Page 223 [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:CENTer? [MAXimum|MINimum] Response On the use of MAXimum <freq> Maximum settable frequency of MG3710A/MG3740A On the use of MINimum Minimum settable frequency of MG3710A/MG3740A (9 kHz) On unused Center frequency Parameter Frequency <freq> Range Depends on the frequency setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A.
  • Page 224 [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:SPAN? [MAXimum|MINimum] Response On the use of MAXimum <freq> Maximum settable frequency span of MG3710A/MG3740A Maximum settable frequency of MG3710A/MG3740A – 9 kHz On the use of MINimum Minimum settable frequency of MG3710A/MG3740A (0 Hz) On unused Span frequency Parameter Frequency <freq>...
  • Page 225 Press F3 Level Start to display the Level Start dialog box in the active function frame. Set the start output level. Range Same as the output level setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A. Resolution 0.01 dB Default Same as the output level initial value of MG3710A/MG3740A.
  • Page 226 Press F4 Level Stop to display the Level Stop dialog box in the active function frame. Set the stop output level. Range Same as the output level setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 dB Default Same as the output level initial value of MG3710A/MG3740A Figure 6.3.1-4 Level Stop Dialog Box...
  • Page 227 Sweep Function Sweep points: Points or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure Step Sweep > Points Sets the point number on the Sweep function. Press F5 Points to display the Points dialog box in the active function frame. Set the point number. Range Minimum value Maximum value 1000...
  • Page 228 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Dwell Time or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure Step Sweep > Dwell Time Sets the dwell time at each point on the Sweep function execution. Press F6 Dwell Time to display the Dwell Time dialog box in the active function frame.
  • Page 229 Sweep Function Step Shape or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure Step Sweep > Step Shape Selects the sweep shape from normal sweep or triangle sweep on the Sweep function. Press F8 Step Shape to switch the normal sweep/triangle sweep. Saw Tooth Normal sweep (Default) Triangle Triangle sweep...
  • Page 230 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Remote command Select the sweep shape on the Sweep function Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:SWEep:SHAPe <shape> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:SWEep:SHAPe? Response <shape> Parameter Sweep shape <shape> Normal sweep (Default) SAWTooth Triangle sweep TRIangle Programming Example To set the sweep shape to the triangle sweep. SWE:SHAP TRI SWE:SHAP? >...

  • Page 231: List Function: Configure Step Sweep

    List Function: Configure Step Sweep 6.4 List Function: Configure Step Sweep or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure List Sweep Configures the settings to execute the List function. Press F7 Configure List Sweep in the Sweep/List function menu to display the ListTable function menu and List Table. Table 6.4-1 List Table Function Menu Page Menu Display...

  • Page 232: List Table Setting

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.4.1 List Table setting or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure List Sweep F1 key in the function menu depends on the item selected with the cursor on List Table. Move the cursor with the rotary knob or step key to set items. Figure 6.4.1-1 List Table SG setting: SG or Top >...
  • Page 233 When the cursor is on “Frequency”, F1 key is “Edit Item”. Press F1 Edit Item to display the Frequency dialog box in the active function frame. Set the frequency. Range Same as the frequency setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 Hz Default 1 GHz Figure 6.4.1-2 Frequency Dialog Box...
  • Page 234 <integer> Range 1 to 500 Resolution Default Frequency <freq> Range Depends on the frequency setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A. Resolution 0.01 Hz Default 1 GHz Suffix code HZ, KHZ, KZ, MHZ, MZ, GHZ, GZ When omitted Programming Example To set 800 MHz to the list number 1.
  • Page 235 <ampl> Parameter List number <integer> Range 1 to 500 Resolution Default Output level <ampl> Range Output level setting range of MG3710A/MG3740A Resolution 0.01 dB Default Minimum output level of MG3710A/MG3740A Suffix code DBM, DM, DBUV, DBUVE DBM when omitted 6-33...
  • Page 236 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Programming Example To set –30.00 dBm to the list number 1. LIST:POW:SPEC 1,–30.00 LIST:POW:SPEC? 1 > –30.00 Setting dwell time: Edit Item or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure List Sweep > Edit Item When the cursor is on “Dwell”, F1 key is “Edit Item”. Press F1 Edit Item to display the Dwell dialog box in the active function frame.
  • Page 237 List Function: Configure Step Sweep Parameter List number <integer> Range 1 to 500 Resolution Default Dwell time <time> Range 100 s to 16 s 1 s (990 ns) Resolution Default 2 ms Suffix code S, MS, US, NS, PS S when omitted Programming Example To set 200 s to the list number 1.
  • Page 238 Chapter 6 Sweep/List For SG with two lists It is same as the SG with one list that the signal output of the next Element is started after Dwell Time; however, the other SG which is not the target SG for the next Element keeps unchanged status (the signal output is not stopped).

  • Page 239: Inserting/Deleting Row For List Table

    List Function: Configure Step Sweep 6.4.2 Inserting/deleting row for List Table Insertion/deletion of input row for List Table is executed. Inserting row to List Table: Insert Row or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure List Sweep > Insert Row Press F2 Insert Row to add a row beneath the row where the cursor is positioned and existed rows are replaced down by one row.
  • Page 240 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Deleting row from List Table: Delete Row or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure List Sweep > Delete Row Press F3 Delete Row to delete the row where the cursor is positioned and existed rows are replaced up by one row. Figure 6.4.2-2 Delete Row Remote command Delete the specified row...
  • Page 241 List Function: Configure Step Sweep Figure 6.4.2-3 Clear Remote command Delete all rows of List Table Command [:SOURce]:LIST:TYPE:LIST:INITialize:PRESet Programming Example To delete all rows of List Table. LIST:TYPE:LIST:INIT:PRES 6-39...

  • Page 242: Selecting Dwell Time: Dwell Type

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.4.3 Selecting dwell time: Dwell Type or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure List Sweep > Dwell Type Selects the Dwell Time used on the List function. Press F6 Dwell Type to switch List/Sweep. List Applies the Dwell Time in List. (Default) Sweep Applies the Dwell Time set with the Sweep function menu.

  • Page 243: Recalling List Table: Open

    List Function: Configure Step Sweep 6.4.4 Recalling List Table: Open or Top > Sweep/List, > Configure List Sweep > Open Recalls the saved List Table file. Remote command Recall the saved List Table file Command :MMEMory:LOAD:LIST <string>[,<device>] Parameter File name without an extension <string>...
  • Page 244 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Figure 6.4.4-1 List Table Recall Screen Select the List Table file to be recalled. Press F7 Open to recall the selected List Table file. Note: File names starting with numbers are displayed, and after that those starting with alphabets are displayed. If no List Table file exists, “File not found”...

  • Page 245: Saving List Table: Save

    A destination path to save the file is the following directory in the specified drive. Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\ListTable\ Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 246 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Setting method Example: To save the currently displayed List Table with the file name of “ABC”. Press F8 Save in the List Table function menu to display the List Table Save dialog box in the active function frame, File List dialog box in the function display frame, and List Table Save function menu in the function menu frame.
  • Page 247 When you input a file name, an extension is automatically added. You cannot specify an extension. The maximum 100 characters are allowed for a file name. Destination path: Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\ListTable\ Default destination name: List[date]_[additional number].csv The additional number will be the minimum three-digit numerical number within 000 to 999 which does not exist.

  • Page 248: Point Trigger

    Chapter 6 Sweep/List 6.5 Point Trigger or Top > Sweep/List, > Point Trigger Sets the point trigger to move to the next point on Sweep/List function. Note: The Point Trigger uses the trigger signal input as Pattern Trigger1. For the input connector setting, refer to Section 7.4.1 “Route Input Connectors”.
  • Page 249 Point Trigger Point Trigger or Top > Sweep/List, > Point Trigger > Point Trigger Enables/disables the trigger on Sweep/List function. Press F1 Point Trigger to switch the trigger On/Off. Does not use the trigger (Default). Uses the trigger. When Manual Mode is On, Manual has priority and Trigger is ignored. Remote command Enables/disables the trigger Command...
  • Page 250 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Trigger mode: Mode or Top > Sweep/List, > Point Trigger > Mode The trigger mode on Sweep/List function is selected. Press F2 Mode to switch Start/Point trigger. Start Start trigger (Default) Point Point trigger Remote command Set the trigger mode Command [:SOURce]:LIST:TRIGger:MODE STARt|POINts Query...
  • Page 251 Point Trigger Point Trigger SG output Time Point Trigger Transition to next state with trigger Figure 6.5-2 Point Trigger Trigger source: Source or Top > Sweep/List, > Point Trigger > Source Sets the trigger source on Sweep/List function. Press F3 Source to display the Point Trigger function menu and select the trigger source.
  • Page 252 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Programming Example To set the trigger source to the internal timer. LIST:TRIG:SOUR TIM LIST:TRIG:SOUR? > TIM Trigger delay: Delay or Top > Sweep/List, > Point Trigger > Delay Sets the delay time from Point Trigger input to hardware settings on Sweep/List function.
  • Page 253 Point Trigger Trigger edge: Edge or Top > Sweep/List, > Point Trigger > Edge Sets the polarity to be triggered for External PointTriggerSource. Press F5 Edge to switch Rise/Fall. Rise Rise (Default) Fall Fall Remote command Set the trigger polarity Command :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative Query...
  • Page 254 Chapter 6 Sweep/List Timer Period or Top > Sweep/List, > Point Trigger > Timer Period Sets the timer trigger period. Press F6 Timer Period to display the Timer Period dialog box in the active function frame. Set the period. 500 s to 4000 s Range Resolution 1 s...

  • Page 255: Chapter 7 Modulation

    Chapter 7 Modulation This chapter describes the operations and input/output signal settings related to the modulation function of MG3710A/MG3740A. Note on remote command: When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions. Refer to Appendix E, 7.6 “Selecting SG1/2”...

  • Page 256: Setting Modulation Analysis

    This section assumes that you press Mode and the digital modulation setting mode has been activated, unless otherwise specified. Figure 7.1-1 Outline of MG3710A/MG3740A modulation circuit Settings of ARB of the digital modulation setting mode and AWGN, Analog/Pulse, I/Q, Modulation, and SG Output on the Top function menu switch the flow of modulated signals and decide the type of signals output from the RF and I/Q output.
  • Page 257 Setting Digital Modulation Analysis Table 7.1-1 Digital modulation Setup State and Signal Output Settings Output Signal I/Q Src I/Q Out Modulation I/Q Out RF Output Internal, No output Analog I/Q In Analog I/Q In External vector modulation Internal Internal vector modulation Internal, Analog I/Q...

  • Page 258: Display Description

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.1.1 Display description This section describes the Hardware Block Chart. For the ARB Info display description, refer to 7.3.1 “ARB”. Press the Top menu to display the Hardware Block Chart and each of SG1 and SG2 has the independent display screen. Press each displayed block to display the function menu and dialog box necessary for setting.
  • Page 259 Setting Digital Modulation Analysis Table 7.1.1-1 Hardware Block Chart Display Details Display Display Description Example ARB block On/Off Indicates On/Off of ARB (function to generate modulated signals with arbitrary waveform patterns). Out: Indicates On/Off of the arbitrary waveform pattern output. AWGN AWGN block On/Off...
  • Page 260 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.1.1-1 Hardware Block Chart Display Details (Continued) Display Display Description Example Analog I/Q In Indicates the Analog I/Q signal is set to the external input. LO In Indicates the SG1 Local signal source is set to (For SG1) Ext (input from the rear LO Input connector).
  • Page 261 Setting Digital Modulation Analysis Remote command Query the pattern playback status Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:REGister[:STATus]? Response <status> Parameter Playback status <status> Value = bit0 + bit1 + bit2 + bit3 + bit4 + bit5 + bit6 + bit7 bit2 : 2^2 = 4 Playing bit0, 1, 3 to 15 Not used...
  • Page 262 Chapter 7 Modulation Resident display frame ARB Information of the waveform pattern selected with ARB function is displayed in the resident display frame in the lower function display frame. In MG3740A, resident display frame ARB is available only when option-020/120 is installed. Figure 7.1.1-2 Resident Display Frame ARB Table 7.1.1-2 Resident Display Frame ARB Function...
  • Page 263 Displays the Rate Mismatch information. Mismatch Mismatch This is displayed when the rate matching is display unavailable due to internal operation clock limitation of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Refer to Figure 7.3.2-6 “Rate Matching Function”. FIR Error FIR Error Displays the FIR Error information. display...
  • Page 264 Chapter 7 Modulation Rate Mismatch The Rate Mismatch message is displayed only when “Mismatch” of Rate Matching has occurred in the ARB field of the resident display frame. Remote command Query the status of Rate Matching Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:RMATching:ERRor? Response <status> Parameter Status of Rate Matching <status>...
  • Page 265 FIR filter of the MG3710A/MG3740A. With the Internal FIR function, the signal to which the FIR filter is applied can be output within the MG3710A/MG3740A under the following conditions. - Combination file...

  • Page 266: Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse

    Notes: If the output modulated wave exceeds the modulation • bandwidth of the MG3710A/MG3740A, a missing signal/alias may occur. When AM modulation, FM modulation, or φM modulation is executed, be careful that the bandwidth used does not to exceed the modulation bandwidth.
  • Page 267 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Table 7.2-1 Analog Pulse Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Displays the AM function menu to set the settings related to AM (amplitude) modulation. Refer to 7.2.1 “AM Modulation: AM”. FM/φM Displays the FM/φM function menu to set the settings related to FM (frequency) modulation/φM (phase) modulation.

  • Page 268: Am Modulation: Am

    This is available only when additional analog AM2 Setup modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press AM1 Setup (AM2 Setup) on the AM function menu to open the AM1 setup (AM2 setup) function menu. Example: To execute the AM modulation.
  • Page 269 Sets the AM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog Setup AM Source modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Adjusts the phase of internal AM modulation signal. Phase Adjust This is available only when additional analog 0.0 deg modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed.
  • Page 270 Chapter 7 Modulation AM Modulation On/Off: AM or Top > > Analog/Pulse > AM > AM1 Setup (AM2 Setup), AM Enables/disables AM (amplitude) modulation. Press F1 AM on the AM1 Setup (AM2 Setup) Function Menu to turn on/off. Disables AM Modulation (Default). Enables AM Modulation.
  • Page 271 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Remote command Select the AM modulation application type Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:AM:TYPE LINear|EXPonential Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:AM:TYPE? Response <type> LIN or EXP Parameter Type <type> LINear Linear format (Default) Exponential format EXPonential Programming Example To set the AM modulation application type to the linear format. AM:TYPE LIN AM:TYPE? >...
  • Page 272 Chapter 7 Modulation When the AM modulation is executed for the CW signal with the amplitude A, the signal below is created. Ampiltude A×(1+AMDepth/100) time 1/AMRate Figure 7.2.1-1 AM Modulation (Lin) Remote command Set the AM modulation depth with the linear value Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:AM[1]|2[:DEPTh][:LINear] <percent>...
  • Page 273 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse AM Depth (Log) or Top > > Analog/Pulse > AM>AM1 Setup (AM2 Setup), AM Depth (Log) Sets the AM modulation depth with the Log value. This cannot be set when the external modulation signal is selected (Ext is selected in the AM source).
  • Page 274 Chapter 7 Modulation Details This can be set when an exponential function waveform is set at AM Depth Type. Programming Example To set the AM modulation depth to 5 dB with the Log value. AM:EXP 5 AM:EXP? > 5.00 AM Rate or Top >...
  • Page 275 Setup AM Source Sets the AM modulation signals. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F6 Setup AM Source on the AM1 Setup (AM2 Setup) function menu to open the Setup AM Source function menu.
  • Page 276 Setup AM Source, AM Source Switches the AM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F1 AM Source on the Setup AM Source function menu for selection. Internal modulation signal (Default)
  • Page 277 Selects the waveform of the internal modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F2 Waveform on the Setup AM Source function menu for selection. This can be set when Int is selected in the AM source.
  • Page 278 Chapter 7 Modulation Triangle Sine Positive Ramp Negative Ramp Square Figure 7.2.1-3 Type of Analog Waveform Remote command Select the waveform of the internal AM modulation signal Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:AM[1]|2:INTernal:FUNCtion[1]|2:SHAPe SINE|TRIangle|SQUare|RAMP Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:AM[1]|2:INTernal:FUNCtion[1]|2:SHAPe? Response <type> SINE,TRI,SQU,RAMP 7-24...
  • Page 279 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Parameter waveform <type> Sine (Default) SINE TRIangle Triangle Square SQUare Ramp RAMP Programming Example To set the waveform of the internal AM modulation signal to the Triangle. AM:INT:FUNC:SHAP TRI AM:INT:FUNC:SHAP? > TRI Remote command Select the shape of the ramp wave Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:AM[1]|2:INTernal:FUNCtion:SHAPe:RAMP POSitive|NEGative...
  • Page 280 Sets the DC coupling or AC coupling for the external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F6 Coupling on the Setup AM Source function menu for selection. DC coupling (Default)
  • Page 281 > Analog/Pulse > AM>AM1 Setup (AM2 Setup)> Setup AM Source, Impedance Sets the termination for the external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F7 Impedance on the Setup AM Source function menu for selection. 50 Ω...
  • Page 282 Adjusts the DC offset for external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. This can be used when in the modulation output status (setting either AM, FM, φM, or Pulse modulations to On, and Mod to On).
  • Page 283 Adjusts a phase of internal AM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F7 Phase Adjust on the AM1 Setup (AM2 Setup) function menu to set with the Phase Adjust dialog box.

  • Page 284: Fm/ Φ M

    This is available only when additional analog FM/φM2 Setup modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press FM/ φ M1 Setup ( FM/φM2 Setup) on the AM function menu to open the FM/φM1 (FM/φM2) function menu. Example: To execute the FM modulation.
  • Page 285 Sets the FM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog Setup FM Source modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Adjusts the phase of internal FM modulation signal. Phase Adjust This is available only when additional analog 0.0 deg modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed.
  • Page 286 Chapter 7 Modulation FM modulation On/Off: FM or Top > > Analog/Pulse > FM/ φ M>FM/ φ M1 Setup (FM/ φ M2 Setup), FM Enables/disables the FM (frequency) modulation. Press F1 FM on the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to set On/Off.
  • Page 287 Default 1 kHz (FM/φM1) 0 Hz (FM/φM2) FM Deviation2nd is the frequency deviation of FM/φM2 available when MG3710A/MG3740A-080/180 is installed. In FM Deviation2nd, the maximum value is calculated by applying FM Deviation. FM Deviation + FMDeviation2nd ≤ 40 MHz FM Rate + FM Deviation ≤ 50 MHz FM Rate + FM Deviation ≤...
  • Page 288 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Set the FM frequency deviation Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:FM[1]|2[:DEViation] <freq> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:FM[1]|2[:DEViation]? Response Unit: HZ <freq> Parameter FM frequency deviation <freq> Range When FM Waveform is Sine: 0 Hz to (40 MHz – FMDeviation2nd or 0 Hz to (50 MHz–FM Rate) the maximum is whichever smaller.
  • Page 289 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse FM modulation frequency: FM Rate or Top > > Analog/Pulse > FM/ φ M>FM/ φ M1 Setup (FM/ φ M2 Setup), FM Rate Sets the FM modulation frequency. Press F3 FM Rate on the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to set with the FM Rate dialog box.
  • Page 290 (FM/ φ M2 Setup), Setup FM Source Sets the FM modulation signals. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F4 Setup FM Source on the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to open the Setup FM Source function menu.
  • Page 291 (FM/ φ M2 Setup) > Setup FM Source, FM Source Switches the FM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F1 FM Source on the Setup FM Source function menu for selection. Internal modulation signal (Default)
  • Page 292 Selects the waveform of the internal modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F2 Waveform on the Setup FM Source function menu for selection. This can be set when Int is selected in the FM source.
  • Page 293 Sets the DC coupling or AC coupling for the external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F6 Coupling on the Setup FM Source function menu for selection. DC coupling (Default)
  • Page 294 (FM/ φ M2 Setup) > Setup FM Source, Impedance Sets the termination for the external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F7 Impedance on the Setup FM Source function menu for selection.
  • Page 295 Adjusts the DC offset for external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. This can be used when in the modulation output status (setting either AM, FM, φM, or Pulse modulations to On, and Mod to On).
  • Page 296 Adjusts a phase of internal FM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F5 Phase Adjust on the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to set with the Phase Adjust dialog box.
  • Page 297 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse φ M modulation On/Off: φ M or Top > > Analog/Pulse > FM/ φ M>FM/ φ M1 Setup (FM/ φ M2 Setup) > , φ M Enables/disables the φM (phase) modulation. Press F1 φ M in the second page of the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to set On/Off.
  • Page 298 Chapter 7 Modulation φ M Deviation or Top > > Analog/Pulse > FM/ φ M>FM/ φ M1 Setup (FM/ φ M2 Setup) > , φ M Deviation Sets the φM deviation angle. Press F2 φ M Deviation in the second page of the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to set with the φM Deviation dialog box.
  • Page 299 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Parameter φM deviation angle <ext_numeric> Range When φM Waveform is Sine: 0 rad to 160 rad, or (40 MHz ÷ φM Rate) rad, whichever smaller When φM Waveform is other than Sine: 0 rad to 160 rad, or (4 MHz ÷...
  • Page 300 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Set the φ M modulation frequency Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:PM[1]|2:INTernal:FREQuency <freq> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:PM[1]|2:INTernal:FREQuency? Response Unit: HZ <freq> Parameter φM modulation frequency <freq> Range When φM Waveform is Sine: 0.1 Hz to 40 MHz, or (40 MHz ÷ φM Deviation) MHz, whichever smaller When φM Waveform is other than Sine: 0.1 Hz to 4 MHz,...
  • Page 301 Sets the φM modulation signals. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F4 Setup φ M Source in the second page of the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to open the Setup φM Source function menu.
  • Page 302 > Setup φ M Source, φ M Source Switches the φM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F1 φ M Source on the Setup φM Source function menu for selection. Internal modulation signal (Default)
  • Page 303 Selects the waveform of the φM internal modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F2 Waveform on the Setup φM Source function menu for selection. This can be set when Int is selected in the φM source.
  • Page 304 Sets the DC coupling or AC coupling for the external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F6 Coupling on the Setup φM Source function menu for selection. DC coupling (Default)
  • Page 305 > Setup φ M Source,Impedance Sets the termination for the external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F7 Impedance on the Setup φM Source function menu for selection. 50 Ω...
  • Page 306 Adjusts the DC offset for external modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. This can be used when in the modulation output status (setting either AM, FM, φM, or Pulse modulations to On, and Mod to On).
  • Page 307 Adjusts a phase of internal φM modulation signal. This is available only when additional analog modulation input option (MG3710A/MG3740A-050/080/150/180) is installed. Press F5 Phase Adjust in the second page of the FM/φM1 Setup (FM/φM2 Setup) function menu to set with the Phase Adjust dialog box.

  • Page 308: Pulse

    Pulse modulation with RF Gate For the pulse modulation method with the pulse modulation control bit (RF Gate) added to the waveform pattern, refer to 4.5.5 “Input file MG3700A/MG3710A Vector Signal Generator MG3740A format” in the Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual (IQproducer , and for the RF Gate setting method, refer to 7.3.7 “RF Gate”...
  • Page 309 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Example: To execute the Pulse modulation. Set the Pulse modulation to On with F1 Pulse . Select the Pulse modulation signal source with F2 Pulse Source . Set the settings of F3 Pulse Rate to F8 Pulse 2 Width according to the Pulse modulation signal source.
  • Page 310 Chapter 7 Modulation Pulse or Top > > Analog/Pulse > Pulse , Pulse Enables/disables the Pulse modulation. Press F1 Pulse on the Pulse function menu to set On/Off. Disables Pulse modulation (Default). Enables Pulse modulation. Remote command Enable/disable the Pulse modulation Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:PULM:STATe <boolean>...
  • Page 311 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Pulse Source or Top > > Analog / Pulse > Pulse , Pulse Source Selects the Pulse modulation signal source. Press F2 Pulse Source on the Pulse function menu to open the Pulse Source function menu for selection. Table 7.2.3-2 Pulse Source Function Menu Page Menu Display...
  • Page 312 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.2.3-2 Pulse Source Function Menu (Cont’d) Page Menu Display Function Generates two pulses in synchronization with the trigger event. The delay time after the trigger event and pulse width are set with Pulse Delay and Pulse 2 Delay, and Pulse Width and Pulse 2 Width.
  • Page 313 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Table 7.2.3-2 Pulse Source Function Menu (Cont’d) Page Menu Display Function Generates the internal pulse string. However, pulses are valid only when the trigger is being input. The period and pulse width are set with Pulse Period and Pulse Width.
  • Page 314 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Select the Pulse modulation signal source from Freerun or Ext Pulse Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:PULM:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:PULM:SOURce? Response <type> INT or EXT Parameter Signal source <type> Freerun (Default) INTernal EXTernal Ext Pulse Programming Example To set the Pulse modulation signal source to Freerun. PULM:SOUR INT PULM:SOUR? >...
  • Page 315 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Programming Example To set the Pulse modulation signal source to Freerun. PULM:SOUR:INT FRUN PULM:SOUR:INT? > FRUN Pulse Rate or Top > > Analog/Pulse > Pulse, Pulse Rate Sets the Pulse modulation frequency. Press F3 Pulse Rate on the Pulse function menu to set with the Pulse Rate dialog box.
  • Page 316 Chapter 7 Modulation Pulse Period or Top > > Analog/Pulse > Pulse , Pulse Period Sets the Pulse modulation period. Press F4 Pulse Period on the Pulse function menu to set with the Pulse Period dialog box. This can be set when Freerun,Gated is selected at Pulse Source.
  • Page 317 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Pulse Delay or Top > > Analog / Pulse > Pulse , Pulse Delay Sets the Pulse modulation delay time after the trigger event. Press F5 Pulse Delay on the Pulse function menu to set with the Pulse Delay dialog box.
  • Page 318 Chapter 7 Modulation Pulse Width or Top > > Analog / Pulse > Pulse , Pulse Width Sets the Pulse modulation width. Press F6 Pulse Width on the Pulse function menu to set with the Pulse Width dialog box. This can be set when Freerun, Triggered, Adjustable Doublet, Trigger Doublet, Gated is selected at Pulse Source.
  • Page 319 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Details This can be set when Freerun, Triggered, Adjustable Doublet, Trigger Doublet, Gated is selected at Pulse modulation signal source. As for node :PWIDth[1]|2 , select Pulse Width or Pulse 2 Width. Set as follows: Pulse Width: :PWIDth1 or :PWIDth Pulse 2 Width: :PWIDth2 Programming Example To set the first Pulse modulation width to 5 µs.
  • Page 320 Chapter 7 Modulation Details This can be set when Adjustable Doublet is selected at Pulse modulation signal source. As for node :DELay[1]|2 , select Pulse Delay or Pulse 2 Delay . Set as follows: Pulse Delay:: :DELay1 or :DELay. Pulse 2 Delay:: :DELay2 . Programming Example To set the delay time from the first Pulse to the second Pulse to 5 µs.
  • Page 321 Analog Modulation: Analog/Pulse Details This can be set when Adjustable Doublet is selected at Pulse modulation signal source. As for node :PWIDth[1]|2 , select Pulse Width or Pulse 2 Width. Set as follows: Pulse Width: :PWIDth1 or :PWIDth Pulse 2 Width: :PWIDth2 Programming Example To set the second Pulse width to 5 µs.
  • Page 322 Chapter 7 Modulation Programming Example To set the output polarity of the Pulse Sync signal and Pulse Video signal to the negative polarity. PULM:INT:VID:POL INV PULM:INT:VID:POL? > INV Pulse Mod input signal polarity: Ext. In Polarity or Top > > Analog / Pulse > Pulse , > >...

  • Page 323: Optimize Function For The Analog Modulation: Optimize

    > Analog/Pulse > Optimize Selects Spurious Mode or Distortion Mode to optimize analog modulation. Because the MG3710A/MG3740A performs analog modulation by quadrature modulator, carrier leak causes distortions. To avoid the distortions, analog modulation is performed with frequency offset in the baseband (Distortion Mode).
  • Page 324 Chapter 7 Modulation Programming Example To enable the frequency offset of the analog modulation. AOPT:MODE DIST AOPT:MODE? > DIST 7-70...

  • Page 325: Baseband Mode

    When reproducing the waveform pattern, it is necessary first to load the package pattern stored in the internal hard disk into the waveform memory. MG3710A/MG3740A has two waveform memories of I and Q which have two channels configuration, and the package pattern is loaded into either one or both of them.
  • Page 326 Chapter 7 Modulation Pattern11 Pattern12 Pattern21 Combination1 Combination2 Pattern22 Pattern31 Pattern32 Pattern combination is specified. Figure 7.3-1 Relation of Pattern File and Combination File Package1 Package2 Package3 Package4 Pattern11 Pattern21 Pattern31 Pattern41 Internal HDD Pattern12 Pattern22 Pattern32 Pattern42 Pattern13 Pattern23 Pattern33 Pattern43 Pattern package is selected from internal HDD and loaded into waveform memory.
  • Page 327 (supplied application software). • Creates the waveform pattern with IQproducer (supplied application software) installed in the MG3710A/MG3740A. For the method to transfer with IQproducer , refer to the MG3700A/MG3710A Vector Signal Generator MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual (IQproducer 7-73...

  • Page 328: Arb

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.3.1 ARB or Top > Mode Generates modulated signals with arbitrary waveform patterns. In MG3740A, the ARB function can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press Mode of the main function key or F4 Mode on the top function menu to display the ARB Info dialog box and ARB/Waveform function menu.
  • Page 329 Baseband Mode Table 7.3.1-1 ARB Info Display Contents Display Display Description Example Other than the below Combination Indicates to combine the waveform patterns of Memory A and Memory B to output. A+B Sequence Indicates that it is in the sequence mode. Seq.(A), Seq.(A+AWGN) Combination Sequence +...
  • Page 330 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.3.1-1 ARB Info Display Contents (Cont’d) Display Display Description Example Indicates that the signal output from Memory A and the signal output from the waveform memory B are being combined. Click to switch Hardware Block Chart and ARB Info display.
  • Page 331 Baseband Mode ARB On/Off: ARB or Top > Mode, > ARB Enables/disables the function to generate modulated signals with arbitrary waveform patterns. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F1 ARB of the ARB function menu for setting. Does not generate modulated signals with arbitrary waveform patterns.
  • Page 332 Chapter 7 Modulation Restart or Top > Mode, > Restart Restarts the waveform pattern being played. Both Pattern A and B are targeted. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F8 Restart on the ARB function menu for execution. Remote command Restart the waveform pattern Command...
  • Page 333 Baseband Mode Parameter IQ waveform data input amplitude <rel_ampl> Range –8.00 dB to 8.00 dB Resolution 0.01 dB Default 0.00 dB Suffix code DB, When omitted: DB Programming Example To tune the IQ Waveform data input amplitude to 1 dB. RAD:ARB:RMST 1.00 RAD:ARB:RMST? >...

  • Page 334: Pattern Generation Mode: Combination Mode

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.3.2 Pattern generation mode: Combination Mode or Top > Mode, > Combination Mode Sets the function mode to generate the pattern with Baseband. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F2 Combination Mode on the ARB/Waveform function menu for setting.
  • Page 335 Baseband Mode To execute modulation with Defined mode or Top > Mode > Combination Mode Figure 7.3.2-1 ARB Info (Combination) With the Defined mode, the digital modulation setting screen display depends on the contents of the selected waveform file. However, the pattern is output according to the settings of the waveform file;...
  • Page 336 Manual operations is also possible, instead of using the continuous operations. For details of the combination file for the sequence mode with the MG3700A/MG3710A definition of the continuous operations, refer to the Vector Signal Generator MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual (IQproducer™)
  • Page 337 Setting F1 Pattern Trigger on the Pattern Trigger function menu (Refer to 7.3.14 “Pattern Trigger”) to “On” and inputting the external trigger to Pattern Trigger on the back of MG3710A (Refer to 7.4.1 “Route Input Connectors”) moves the operation to the next element.
  • Page 338 Chapter 7 Modulation “Frame” switches the base unit to the frame length of the waveform of each element. External trigger signal Waveform pattern output Data length Frame length Switching time Switching time (Pattern) (Frame) Figure 7.3.2-4 Switching Time 7-84...
  • Page 339 Baseband Mode To output the pattern loaded into Memory A for modulation in Edit mode or Top > Mode > Combination Mode Figure 7.3.2-5 ARB Info The pattern file is selected (the combination file cannot be selected) for modulation in the Edit mode. The pattern is selected for each memory for output.
  • Page 340 A/B Signal Setting . The displayed RF output level may be lower than the minimum output level of the MG3710A/MG3740A depending on the setting of the output level ratio; however, actually there is no output with the level lower than the minimum output level of the MG3710A/MG3740A.
  • Page 341 = 3.25 MHz (270.833 kHz × 12) Figure 7.3.2-6 Rate Matching Function Some combinations of waveform sampling rates may disable rate matching due to internal operation clock limitation of the MG3710A/MG374A. In this case, Rate Mismatch warning is displayed. 7-87...
  • Page 342 Chapter 7 Modulation Figure 7.3.2-7 Rate Mismatch Display Note: When the Rate Mismatch is displayed, the sampling rate of Memory B side is changed to the frequency which is the same as the sampling rate of Memory A side. Therefore, the pattern of Memory B side operates with the sampling clock which differs from the pattern's clock, and is output in a bandwidth which differs from the normal status.
  • Page 343 Baseband Mode To add two waves with same frequency in Edit mode or Top > Mode Figure 7.3.2-9 Two Waves Added Output When the center frequencies of two patterns are to be set to the same value, set the frequency offset to 0 Hz. This function is useful when the transmission signal pattern of Memory A and the delay wave of Memory B are output for measurement of the performance of receiver.
  • Page 344 Chapter 7 Modulation The procedure is explained below. Example: To combine pattern files loaded into Memory A and B with the same frequency. Press F4 Load to select the waveform file and load into the memory. Refer to 7.3.4 “Loading waveform pattern: Load”. Press F2 Combination Mode on the ARB function menu to set to Edit.
  • Page 345 Baseband Mode To give offsets to frequencies of two waves in Edit mode or Top > Mode > ARB Setup Figure 7.3.2-11 Frequency Offset Output When the center frequencies of two patterns are to be displaced, set the frequency offset to the arbitrary value. This function is useful when the transmission signal pattern of Memory A and the interference signal from the adjacent channel of Memory B are output for measurement of the performance of the receiver.
  • Page 346 Chapter 7 Modulation The procedure is explained below. Example: To combine pattern files loaded into Memory A and B with the different frequency. Press F4 Load to select the waveform file and load into the memory. Refer to 7.3.4 “Loading waveform pattern: Load”. Press F2 Combination Mode on the ARB function menu to set to Edit.
  • Page 347 Baseband Mode Various settings for pattern output or Top > Mode In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. To re-output the pattern from the beginning. Without the external trigger signal input, when the end of the waveform pattern is output, the pattern is automatically output from the beginning repeatedly.

  • Page 348: Arb Setup

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.3.3 ARB Setup or Top>Mode, >ARB Setup Press F3 ARB Setup on the ARB function menu to open the ARB Setup function menu. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Table 7.3.3-1 ARB Setup Function Menu Page Menu Display Function...
  • Page 349 Baseband Mode Output A/Output B or Top > Mode ,> ARB Setup > Output A or Output B Enables/disables the Pattern A/B output. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F1 Output A/F3 Output B on the ARB Setup function menu for setting.
  • Page 350 Chapter 7 Modulation Level A/Level B or Top > Mode ,> ARB Setup > Level A or Level B Sets the Pattern A/B output level. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F2 Level A/F4 Level B on the ARB Setup function menu for setting. Resolution 0.01 dB Default...
  • Page 351 Baseband Mode A/B Signal Setting or Top > Mode ,> ARB Setup > A/B Signal Setting Selects the target for level change on A/B Ratio change (The option which is not selected is fixed). In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F5 A/B Signal Setting on the ARB Setup function menu for setting.
  • Page 352 Chapter 7 Modulation A/B Ratio or Top > Mode , > ARB Setup > A/B Ratio Sets the level ratio of Pattern A and Pattern B. A/B is indicated with dB. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F6 A/B Ratio on the ARB Setup function menu for setting.
  • Page 353 In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F7 Sampling Rate A/F8 Sampling Rate B on the ARB Setup function menu for setting with the displayed dialog box. Range 0.02 to 200 MHz (MG3710A) 0.02 to 8 MHz (MG3740A) Resolution 0.001 Hz...
  • Page 354 [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:FREQuency:OFFSet? Response <freq> Unit: HZ Parameter Frequency <freq> Range – 200 MHz /2 to 200 MHz /2 (MG3710A) –8 MHz to 8 MHz (MG3740A) Resolution 1 Hz Default 0 Hz Suffix code HZ, KHZ, KZ, MHZ, MZ, GHZ, GZ When omitted: HZ...
  • Page 355 Baseband Mode Details When CenterSignal is A, the value is offset of B for A. When CenterSignal is B, the value is offset of A for B. FreqOffset = –15MHz FreqOffsetA = +10MHz FreqOffset = 10MHz FreqOffsetB = –15MHz CenterSIgnal = A CenterSIgnal = B CenterSIgnal = Baseband DC –15MHz...
  • Page 356 0 Hz Note: If the output modulated wave exceeds the modulation bandwidth of the MG3710A/MG3740A, a missing signal/alias may occur. When the frequency offset is used, be careful that the bandwidth used does not to exceed the modulation bandwidth. Remote command...
  • Page 357 Baseband Mode Center Signal or Top > Mode ,> ARB Setup > > Center Signal Selects the pattern to be the reference on frequency display. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F3 Center Signal on page 2 of ARB Setup function menu to open the Center Signal function menu for selection.
  • Page 358 Chapter 7 Modulation Start Offset or Top > Mode , > ARB Setup > > Start Offset Sets the time offset of Pattern B based on Pattern A side. The parameter is available only when the waveform is selected in Memory A and B and Output A and B are On at the same time.
  • Page 359 Baseband Mode Spectrum A/Spectrum B or Top > Mode, > ARB Setup > > Spectrum A or Spectrum B I/Q swap for Pattern A is executed and the spectrum is revered. Spectrum A reverses the spectrum of the waveform memory A, and Spectrum B reverses the spectrum of the waveform memory B.

  • Page 360: Loading Waveform Pattern: Load

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.3.4 Loading waveform pattern: Load or Top > Mode > Load Loads the waveform pattern from HDD into the waveform memory. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Notes: To load the waveform pattern to the memory, the license file •...
  • Page 361 Baseband Mode Table 7.3.4-1 Waveform List to Load Display Description Example Drive C: Drive number Pattern in Name of package displaying pattern Packages : Test Package Package file name Name Pattern Pattern file name Name Type File type Status* Status File type Comment Displays the Comment...
  • Page 362 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Query the waveform pattern file version on the hard disk Query To query the version of the single pattern file (wvi/wvd). The version of the combination file (wvc) cannot be confirmed with this command. :MMEMory:WAVeform:VERSion? <string1>,<string2>[,<device>] :MMEMory:WAVeform:SINGle:VERSion? <string1>,<string2>[,<device>] Response...
  • Page 363 Baseband Mode Remote command Query the hard disk free space information Query :MMEMory:FREE[:ALL]? [<device>] Response <integer1>,<integer2> Unit: byte Parameter Source drive number A to Z, drive C when <device> omitted Number of bytes in whole HDD <integer1> Number of bytes of the remaining space <integer2>...
  • Page 364 Chapter 7 Modulation Example: To load the waveform pattern into the waveform memory of MG3710A/MG3740A. The explanation is provided below with the assumption that the Load Waveform function menu is displayed. Press F1 Drive to select the device which includes the waveform pattern to be loaded.
  • Page 365 Baseband Mode Drive or Top > Mode > Load, > Drive Selects the device which includes the waveform pattern to be loaded. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F1 Drive on the Waveform Load function menu to display the Device function menu for selection.
  • Page 366 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter Package name <string1> Character string within 31 characters enclosed by double quotes ( “ ” ) or single quotes ( ‘ ’ ) Pattern name (excluding extensions) <string2> Character string within 100 characters enclosed by double quotes ( “ ” ) or single quotes ( ‘ ’ ) Source drive number A to Z, drive C when <device>...
  • Page 367 Baseband Mode Show Details or Top > Mode > Load, > Show Details Displays the details of the selected waveform pattern information in HDD. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Select Pattern in the Waveform List to Load dialog box and press F5 Show Details on the Waveform Load function menu to display the Details of Waveform Data dialog box.
  • Page 368 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Start loading the waveform pattern from the hard disk to the waveform memory Command :MMEMory[1]|2:LOAD:WAVeform:WMA|WMB|LONG|COMBination <string1>,<string2>[,<device>] Query :MMEMory[1]|2:LOAD:WAVeform:WMA|WMB|LONG|COMBination? <string1>,<string2>[,<device>] Response <status> Parameter <string1> Package name Character string within 31 characters enclosed by double quotes ( “ ” ) or single quotes ( ‘ ’ ) Pattern name (excluding extensions) <string2>...
  • Page 369 Baseband Mode Details If a waveform pattern is loaded when the same waveform pattern has already been loaded, the existing waveform pattern is overwritten. Programming Example To start loading “RMC15k” pattern file in package “WCDMA” in drive E into the SG2 waveform memory A. MMEM2:LOAD:WAV:WMA "WCDMA","RMC15k",E *OPC? // Loaded when 1 is returned...
  • Page 370 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.3.4-3 Confirmation Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Display Function Confirm overwriting Deletes contents of Memory A and Memory B and All Loaded Pattern loads Long Pattern Cancel Returns to the menu before this menu is opened. Select is executed by pressing F7 Confirm overwriting All Loaded Pattern .
  • Page 371 Baseband Mode Loading destination: To Memory or Top > Mode > Load , > To Memory Selects the waveform memory for the pattern to be loaded into. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. This function specifies the loading destination waveform memory when the pattern file is loaded without being LongPattern.
  • Page 372 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Delete the selected waveform pattern in HDD Command To delete the combination file (wvc) or single pattern (wvi/wvd). If there is a wvc/wvi with the same name, the combination file has priority. :MMEMory:DELete:WAVeform[:NAME] <string1>,<string2>,[<device>] To delete the single pattern file (wvi/wvd). The combination file (wvc) cannot be deleted with this command.

  • Page 373: Selecting Output Waveform Pattern: Select

    Baseband Mode 7.3.5 Selecting output waveform pattern: Select or Top > Mode > Select Selects the waveform pattern to be output. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press Select of the main function key or F5 Select on the ARB/Waveform function menu to display the Waveform List to Play dialog box and Waveform Select function menu.
  • Page 374 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.3.5-1 Waveform List to Play Display Description Example in Memory A Indicates the displayed memory when Combination Mode is Edit. Pattern in Name of package displaying pattern Packages : Test Package Package file name Name Pattern Pattern file name Name Type...
  • Page 375 Baseband Mode Table 7.3.5-2 Waveform Select Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Focus Moves the cursor between Package/Pattern frames. Package Pattern Subitem Switches the Subitem displayed items in Waveform List to Play dialog box. Status Select Selects the waveform file to be output. Switches the Memory of the waveform pattern On Memory information to be displayed in Waveform List to Play...
  • Page 376 Chapter 7 Modulation Example: To delete the waveform file from the waveform memory. The explanation is provided below with the assumption that the Waveform Select function menu is displayed. The list of waveform patterns is displayed in the Waveform List to Play dialog box.
  • Page 377 Baseband Mode Programming Example To query the second waveform pattern name loaded in SG1 waveform memory A. MEM:WAV:WMA:NAME? 2 > "WCDMA","TEST" Remote command Query the number of waveform patterns loaded in the waveform memory Query :MEMory[1]|2:WAVeform:WMA|WMB|LONG|COMBination:COUNt? Response <integer> Parameter Number of waveform patterns loaded into <integer>...
  • Page 378 Chapter 7 Modulation Programming Example To query the SG1 waveform memory A free space. MEM:WAV:WMA:FREE? > 1234567890,12345678,123456789 Moving cursor: Focus or Top > Mode > Select, > Focus Moves the cursor between Package/Pattern frames in the Waveform List to Play dialog box. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed.
  • Page 379 Baseband Mode Remote command Select the waveform file to be played from the waveform patterns in the waveform memory Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:WMA|WMB|LONG|COMBination:WAVefo rm <string1>,<string2> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:WMA|WMB|LONG|COMBination:WAVefo Response “NONE” is returned when nothing is selected. <string1> <string2> “NONE” is returned when nothing is selected. Parameter Package name <string1>...
  • Page 380 Chapter 7 Modulation Selecting waveform pattern: On Memory or Top > Mode > Select, > On Memory Switches the Memory of the waveform pattern information to be displayed in Waveform List to Play dialog box. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F8 On Memory on the Waveform Select function menu to switch Memory A and B.
  • Page 381 Baseband Mode Parameter Package name <string1> Character string within 31 characters enclosed by double quotes ( “ ” ) or single quotes ( ‘ ’ ) Pattern name (excluding extensions) <string2> Character string within 100 characters enclosed by double quotes ( “ ” ) or single quotes ( ‘ ’ ) Details This command does not delete waveform patterns on the hard disk.
  • Page 382 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Delete all waveform patterns in the waveform memory Command :MEMory[1]|2:DELete:WAVeform:ALL Details This command does not delete waveform patterns on the hard disk. Programming Example To delete all waveform patterns in SG2 waveform memory. MEM2:DEL:WAV:ALL 7-128...

  • Page 383: Copying External Waveform Pattern: Copy

    Top > Mode ,> Copy Copies the waveform pattern of the external device such as USB memory to the internal HDD of MG3710A/MG3740A. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F6 Copy on the ARB/Waveform function menu to open the Copy Pattern to HDD dialog box and Copy Pattern function menu.
  • Page 384 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.3.6-2 Waveform Copy Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Drive Selects the copy source device for the waveform pattern. Focus Moves the cursor between Package/Pattern frames. Package Pattern Copy Copies the selected waveform pattern to HDD. Pattern/Package Copy All Copies all waveform files/packages to HDD.
  • Page 385 Baseband Mode Notes: Even when only the combination file is copied to the internal hard disk, if the pattern file specified with the combination file does not exist in the internal hard disk, the combination file cannot be loaded into the memory. When copying waveform file, copy the waveform file to the root directory of the target device, or make a sub-directory that bears the name of the package.
  • Page 386 Chapter 7 Modulation Copy source drive: Drive or Top > Mode ,> Copy > Drive Selects the copy source drive for the waveform pattern. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F1 Drive on the Waveform Copy function menu to display the Drive function menu for selection.
  • Page 387 Baseband Mode Copy Pattern/Copy Package or Top > Mode, > Copy > Copy Pattern/Copy Package Copies the selected waveform pattern of the specified drive to HDD. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F6 Copy Pattern/Copy Package on the Waveform Copy function menu for copy.
  • Page 388 Chapter 7 Modulation Programming Example To copy all waveform patterns included in the package “WCDMA” in E drive to D drive. MMEM:COPY:WAV:ALL E,"WCDMA",D To copy the waveform file “TEST” included in the root folder in E drive to D drive. MMEM:COPY:WAV E,ROOT,"TEST",D To copy the single pattern file “TEST”...
  • Page 389 Baseband Mode Note: Press F7 Delete All on the Waveform Copy function menu to delete all waveform patterns according to the setting with F2 Focus regardless of settings in Step 2 and 3. The progress bar window is displayed during copying of pattern files. When copying waveform patterns is finished, the progress bar window is closed.

  • Page 390: Rf Gate

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.3.7 RF Gate or Top > Mode, > > RF Gate Controls the RF output On/Off for the modulated wave to execute the pulse modulation. This function is used for the pulse modulation for the RF output when the burst signal such as TDMA is used. The RF On/Off control can be executed with the pulse modulation control bit (when Edit Mode = Off) added to the waveform pattern or user-specified interval/width (when Edit Mode = On/Sync).
  • Page 391 Baseband Mode RF Gate or Top > Mode ,> > RF Gate > RF Gate Enables/disables the RF Gate function. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F1 RF Gate on the RF Gate function menu to set On/Off. RF Gate is not used.
  • Page 392 Pattern cycle. RF Gate bit in Pattern is disabled. The MG3710A/MG3740A allows handling up to 16 bits of waveform data bit length. In this case, the RF Gate signal cannot be embedded in the waveform data; therefore, this function is used for editing.
  • Page 393 Baseband Mode RF Gate line: Type or Top > Mode, > > RF Gate > Type Selects the number of RF Gate lines to be edited. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F3 Type on the RF Gate function menu for selection. Single The output signal is gated with one RF Gate (Default).
  • Page 394 Chapter 7 Modulation RF Gate offset 1/2: Offset 1/ Offset 2 or Top > Mode ,> > RF Gate > Offset 1/Offset 2 Sets the offset from the top output of Pattern to RF Gate1/2. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F4 Offset 1/F6 Offset 2 on the RF Gate function menu for setting.
  • Page 395 Baseband Mode Parameter Offset value from the top output of Pattern to RF <ext_numeric> Gate1/2 Range Lower limit Upper limit (2^24 – 1) ÷ OverSampling Resolution 0.01 Default Unit SystemUnit A/B Suffix code None Details As for node :PULSe[1]|2 , select RF Gate 1 or RF Gate 2.Set as follows: RF Gate 1: :PULSe1 or :PULSe RF Gate 2: :PULSe2 Programming Example...
  • Page 396 Chapter 7 Modulation SystemUnit A/B Data unit for each system (Symbol, Bit, Chip, and others) DataPointA/B Waveform pattern cycle Note: The following are applied: When Pattern A is output, OverSampling A, SystemUnit A. When Pattern B is output, OverSampling B, SystemUnit B. When both A/B is output, OverSampling A, SystemUnit A.
  • Page 397 Baseband Mode RF Gate cycle: Cycle or Top > Mode ,> > RF Gate > Cycle Sets the cycle for RF Gate1 and RF Gate2. The cycle for RF Gate1 and RF Gate2 is common. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F8 Cycle on the RF Gate function menu for setting.
  • Page 398 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter Cycle for RF Gate1 and RF Gate2 <ext_numeric> Range 1 ÷ OverSampling A/B to (2^24 – 1) ÷ OverSampling A/B Resolution 0.01 Default Unit SystemUnit A/B Suffix code None Programming Example To set the cycle for RF Gate1 and RF Gate2 to 1. RAD:ARB:PULS:EDIT:CYCL 1 RAD:ARB:PULS:EDIT:CYCL? >...

  • Page 399: Start/Frame Trigger

    Baseband Mode 7.3.8 Start/Frame Trigger or Top > Mode ,> > Start/Frame Trigger Sets the settings related to Start/Frame Trigger. This is used to interlock the waveform pattern play operation with the external trigger input. Press F2 Start/Frame Trigger on the ARB/Waveform function menu to open the Start/Frame Trigger function menu.
  • Page 400 Uses the trigger. To output the signal in synchronization with the external trigger signal. MG3710A/MG3740A allows output waveform patterns in synchronization with the trigger signal input from the external. The external trigger signal can be selected from the two types of Start Trigger to specify the waveform pattern output start position and Frame Trigger to specify the output timing for each burst when the burst signal is selected.
  • Page 401 Baseband Mode (2) When the waveform pattern is generated with the application to generate the signal which is the option of IQproducer The frame length supporting each communications system is set automatically. In this case, the values of L and L change depending on whether the system used is for continuous waves or burst waves as follows:...
  • Page 402 Chapter 7 Modulation Frame Trigger operation In Frame Trigger operation, one frame of waveform pattern is output according to the rising timing of the external trigger signal. When the frame output is finished, it'll be in trigger wait state again. The relation between the external trigger signal and waveform pattern output is same as StartTrigger.
  • Page 403 Baseband Mode Frame cycle When external trigger signal cycle is appropriate External trigger signal System N Sample Frame cycle Waveform pattern output When external trigger signal cycle is short Invalid trigger External trigger signal Invalid trigger >=N [Sample] External trigger signal input earlier than Frame cycle by Nsample or more is invalid, and waveform pattern is not output.
  • Page 404 Chapter 7 Modulation Trigger mode: Mode or Top > Mode ,> > Start / Frame Trigger > Mode Selects the operation mode for the trigger to be used for Baseband signal output start. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F2 Mode on the Start/Frame Trigger function menu for selection.
  • Page 405 Baseband Mode Trigger source: Source or Top > Mode ,> > Start / Frame Trigger > Source Selects Start/Frame Trigger Source. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F3 Source on the Start/Frame Trigger function menu to open the S/F Trigger function menu for selection of the trigger source.
  • Page 406 Chapter 7 Modulation Delay or Top > Mode ,> > Start / Frame Trigger > Delay Sets the delay time from the Trigger input to RF signal output. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F4 Delay on the Start/Frame Trigger function menu for setting. Range Varies depending on the selected waveform pattern.
  • Page 407 Baseband Mode Parameter Start trigger delay time <ext_numeric> Range Varies depending on the selected waveform pattern. Resolution 0.01 Default Unit SystemUnit Suffix code None <time> Start trigger delay time Unit Resolution 1 ps Programming Example To set the start trigger delay time to 30 SystemUnit. RAD:ARB:TRIG:DEL 30 RAD:ARB:TRIG:DEL? >...
  • Page 408 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter Trigger input detection edge <edge> Rise, signal rising edge (Default) POSitive NEGative Fall, signal falling edge Programming Example To set the external trigger polarity to Fall. RAD:ARB:TRIG:SLOP NEG RAD:ARB:TRIG:SLOP? > NEG Trigger Key or Top > Mode ,> >...

  • Page 409: Setting Frame Trigger Operation:event

    Baseband Mode 7.3.9 Setting Frame trigger operation:Event or Top > Mode ,> > Start / Frame Trigger > Event Frame trigger has four types of operations. The trigger operation when it is used is set. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F6 Event on the Start/Frame Trigger function menu to open the S/F Trigger Event function menu for selection.
  • Page 410 Chapter 7 Modulation Programming Example To set the trigger operation when Frame trigger is used to No Retrigger. RAD:ARB:TRIG:RETR NOR RAD:ARB:TRIG:RETR? > NOR The trigger operations are described below. Operation description No Retrigger When Frame Trigger is received in the section where the pattern signal output is not finished and the second pattern start position is in the section where the first pattern signal output is not finished, the second pattern output is not executed, and the trigger is discarded.
  • Page 411 Baseband Mode Buffered Trigger When Frame Trigger is received in the section where the pattern signal output is not finished, the second pattern start position is placed to meet the first pattern finish position for output to avoid pattern output overlap. Frame Trigger When the second pattern overlaps with the first one,...

  • Page 412: Frame Count

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.3.10 Frame Count or Top > Mode , > > Start / Frame Trigger > Frame Count Sets the number of frames to output when Frame trigger is input during Frame trigger operation. This is enabled when the trigger mode is set to Frame. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed.
  • Page 413 Baseband Mode When Event is No Retrigger When Frame Trigger is received in the section where the pattern signal output for the number of frames, which is set to Frame Count, is not finished and the second pattern start position is in the section where the first pattern signal output is not finished, the second pattern output is not executed, and the trigger is discarded.
  • Page 414 Chapter 7 Modulation When Event is Restart on Trigger When Frame Trigger is received in the section where the pattern signal output for the number of frames, which is set to Frame Count, is not finished, the first pattern output is stopped, and the second pattern is overwritten.

  • Page 415: Baseband Clock

    Baseband Mode 7.3.11 Baseband Clock or Top > Mode, > > Baseband Clock Sets the settings related to Baseband Clock. This cannot be used in MG3740A. The Baseband Clock function menu is used when the external reference clock is input to be used for Baseband. The arbitrary Sampling Clock can be generated because the input clock is divided with the divider within the hardware.
  • Page 416 The clock input from the rear panel BB REF Clock Input is the reference. Used for synchronization for multiple MG3710As. BB REF Clock Output of MG3710A must be input as the reference. For SG2 The internal signal source is the reference (Default).
  • Page 417 Baseband Mode Clock division ratio: Division or Top > Mode ,> > Baseband Clock > Division Sets the division ratio for the external input Clock for generation of Baseband Reference Clock. This cannot be used in MG3740A. Press F2 Division on the Baseband Clock function menu to open the Baseband Clock Division function menu for selection of the division ratio.
  • Page 418 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Set the division ratio for the external input Clock Command [:SOURce[1]]:RADio:ARB:CLOCk:REFerence:DIVision SIXTeenth|EIGHth|QUARter|HALF|X1|X2|X4|X8|X16 Query [:SOURce[1]]:RADio:ARB:CLOCk:REFerence:DIVision? Response <clock> SIXT,EIGH,QUAR,HALF,X1,X2,X4,X8 or X16 Parameter Baseband signal reference clock <clock> SIXTeenth Sampling Clock × 1/16 Sampling Clock × 1/8 EIGHth Sampling Clock ×...
  • Page 419 Baseband Mode Clock output: Out or Top > Mode, > > Baseband Clock > Out Enables/disables the Baseband clock reference output. This cannot be used in MG3740A. Press F3 Out on the Baseband Clock function menu for setting. This is a shared parameter for each SG. It can be set when either SG1 is in the modulation output status when SG1 is installed or when SG2 is in the modulation output status when SG2 is installed (when waveform selection is Mod=On).
  • Page 420 Chapter 7 Modulation Sampling Clock Queries the Baseband signal output sampling clock. This is a function only with a remote command. Remote command Query the baseband signal sampling clock Query [:SOURce]:RADio:ARB:SCLock:RATE? Response <freq> Unit: Hz Parameter Sampling clock <freq> Range 140 MHz to 200 MHz Resolution 0.001 Hz...

  • Page 421: Marker Setup

    Baseband Mode 7.3.12 Marker Setup or Top > Mode, > > Marker Setup Sets the settings related to Marker. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. The Marker function is used as the trigger out function when the waveform pattern specified positions (the top of Frame, top of burst, or others) are to be used as triggers.
  • Page 422 Chapter 7 Modulation Set the selected waveform Pattern Marker output (output from the rear panel AUX connector). Marker 1 A Setup function menu is described in the table below. Table 7.3.12-2 Marker 1 A Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Edit Mode Enables/disables the Marker 1 edit function.
  • Page 423 Notes: For the method to edit Marker bit in the pattern, refer to • MG3700A/MG3710A Vector Signal Generator MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual (IQproducer OFF can be specified for Marker 1, 2, and 3 only if a waveform •...
  • Page 424 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter User setting mode <mode> Outputs the user setting marker. ON|1 OFF|0 Outputs the marker previously recorded in the waveform pattern. Outputs the marker at the start of the waveform PATSync pattern. Details OFF|0 can be specified for Marker 1, 2, and 3 only if a waveform pattern that consists of 14-bit resolution IQ data is selected.
  • Page 425 Baseband Mode Remote command Set Offset from the top output of Waveform Pattern to Marker 1/2/3 output timing Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:WMA|WMB:MARKer1|2|3:EDIT:OFFSet <ext_numeric> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:WMA|WMB:MARKer1|2|3:EDIT:OFFSet Response <ext_numeric> Parameter Starting offset value <ext_numeric> Setting range, resolution, and default Refer to the above explanation. Unit SystemUnit A/B Suffix code...
  • Page 426 Chapter 7 Modulation Upper limit When Marker1/2/3 Edit ModeA/B is set to “On”: (2^24 – 1) ÷ OverSampling A/B (Rounded to two decimal places) or Marker1/2/3 CycleA/B, whichever smaller When Marker1/2/3 Edit ModeA/B is set to “Sync”: (2^24 – 1) ÷ OverSampling A/B (Rounded to two decimal places) or DataPointA/B ÷...
  • Page 427 Baseband Mode Cycle or Top > Mode, > > Marker Setup > Marker 1/2/3 A/B > Cycle Sets the output cycle of Marker. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F4 Cycle on the Marker 1/2/3 A(B) function menu for setting. Setting range Lower limit 1 ÷...
  • Page 428 Chapter 7 Modulation Polarity or Top > Mode, > > Marker Setup > Marker 1/2/3 A/B > Polarity Sets the output polarity of Marker. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F8 Polarity on the Marker 1/2/3 A(B) function menu for setting. Positive Positive polarity (Default) Negative...

  • Page 429: Sequence Mode

    In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. For the creation method for combination files for Sequence Mode, refer to MG3700A/MG3710A Vector Signal Generator MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual (IQproducer Press F7 Sequence Mode on page 2 of ARB/Waveform function menu to open the Sequence Progress dialog box and Sequence Mode function menu.
  • Page 430 Chapter 7 Modulation Note: For Add Pattern, refer to 4.8.2 “Combination File Edit screen” in MG3700A/MG3710A Vector Signal Generator MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Operation Manual (IQproducer Table 7.3.13-1 Sequence Mode Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Proceeds with the elements of the sequence mode to Next Pattern the next element.
  • Page 431 Baseband Mode Sequence Restart or Top > Mode ,> > Sequence Mode > Sequence Restart Restarts the elements from the top in the sequence mode. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F2 Sequence Restart on the Sequence Mode function menu for execution.
  • Page 432 Chapter 7 Modulation Play Mode or Top > Mode ,> > Sequence Mode > Play Mode Selects the play mode for elements of the sequence mode. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F3 Play mode on the Sequence Mode function menu for selection. Auto Proceeds with elements automatically.
  • Page 433 Baseband Mode Repeat Mode or Top > Mode ,> > Sequence Mode > Repeat Mode Selects the operation after the last element is executed in the sequence mode. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F4 Repeat mode on the Sequence Mode function menu for selection.
  • Page 434 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Set the RepeatCount of each index for Sequence Mode Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:SEQuence:ELEMent:RCOunt <integer>,<ext_integer> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADio:ARB:SEQuence:ELEMent:RCOunt? <integer> Response <ext_integer> Parameter Index <integer> Range 1 to 200 Default Suffix code None RepeatCount <ext_integer> Range 0 to 65535 Resolution Default Suffix code None...

  • Page 435: Pattern Trigger

    Baseband Mode 7.3.14 Pattern Trigger or Top > Mode ,> > Sequence Mode > PatternTrigger Uses the pattern trigger to proceed with patterns to the next pattern in the sequence mode. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Note: In the sequence mode, the pattern trigger and pattern status are used as the trigger to be used to proceed with patterns to the next...
  • Page 436 Chapter 7 Modulation Pattern Trigger or Top > Mode, > > Sequence Mode > PatternTrigger > PatternTrigger Sets whether the trigger is to be used or not to be used for Sequence Mode pattern switching. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F1 Pattern Trigger on the Pattern Trigger function menu for setting.
  • Page 437 Baseband Mode Pattern Trigger 1/2/3 or Top > Mode, > > Sequence Mode > PatternTrigger > PatternTrigger 1/2/3 Sets the pattern trigger 1/2/3. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F2 Pattern Trigger 1 to F4 Pattern Trigger 3 on the Pattern Trigger function menu to display the Pattern Trigger 1 to Pattern Trigger 3 function menus.
  • Page 438 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter Trigger On/Off <boolean> Disables the pattern trigger 1/2/3 (Default). OFF|0 ON|1 Enables the pattern trigger 1/2/3. Programming Example To enable the pattern trigger 1. RAD:ARB:SEQ:TRIG1:STAT ON RAD:ARB:SEQ:TRIG1:STAT? > 1 Trigger source: Source or Top > Mode, > >...
  • Page 439 Baseband Mode Programming Example To set the pattern trigger 1 trigger source to Trigger Key. RAD:ARB:SEQ:TRIG1:SOUR KEY RAD:ARB:SEQ:TRIG1:SOUR? > KEY Pattern Status The pattern status is a type of trigger to be used to proceed with patterns to the next pattern in the sequence mode. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed.
  • Page 440 Chapter 7 Modulation Edge or Top > Mode, > > Sequence Mode > PatternTrigger > PatternTrigger 1/2/3 > Edge Sets the pattern trigger 1/2/3 edge. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F3 Edge on the Pattern Trigger 1/2/3 function menu for setting. Rise Applies the trigger at the signal rising.
  • Page 441 Baseband Mode Switching Point >Sequence Mode>PatternTrigger >Switching or Top>Mode, > Point Selects the switching timing to move to the next element on pattern trigger input. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F5 Switching Point on the Sequence Mode function menu for selection.
  • Page 442 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter Switching timing to move to the next element <mode> Switched to the next element with the data PATTern length of the waveform pattern of each element as the base unit (Default). Switched to the next element with the frame FRAMe length of the waveform pattern of each element as the base unit.

  • Page 443: Sync Multi Sg

    Note: When several MG3710A units are connected, sometimes the output level of the MG3710A LO Output is outside the LO Input it level range, depending on the set frequency. In this case, use an external LO signal source to input a LO signal with the appropriate level to the MG3710A LO Input connector.
  • Page 444 Chapter 7 Modulation Common Setting Number of Slaves: 3 LO Sync: On Start Frame TRIG Input Ext Trig MG3710A Sync Type:Master 1. Buffer Output MG3710A REF Input Sync Type:Slave Slave Position: 1 2. BB REF CLK Output BB REF CLK Input 3.
  • Page 445 Note: When several MG3710A units are connected, sometimes the output level of the MG3710A LO Output is outside the LO Input level range, depending on the set frequency. In this case, use an external LO signal source to input a LO signal with the appropriate level to the MG3710A LO Input connector.
  • Page 446 Chapter 7 Modulation 1.6 Adjust the I/Q Phase of SG1 (coarse adjustment). Estimate the phase difference between SG1/2 using the behavior where CW signals with the phase difference of 180 degrees negate each other. Adjust the SG1 I/Q Phase to the values where the mixed wave output level becomes the minimum.
  • Page 447 Baseband Mode Display description Press F8 Sync Multi SG on the ARB/Waveform function menu page 2 to display the Sync Multi SG. Figure 7.3.15-3 Sync Multi SG Notes: The figure above is for explanation; it is different from the • actual display.
  • Page 448 Table 7.3.15-1 Sync Multi SG Display Contents Display Example Display Description Master, Displays the order of connecting MG3710A units when using several MG3710A units. Slave#1 to Slave#3 This is displayed when Sync Type is Master or Slave. The number of Slaves displayed depends on the “Number of Slaves”...
  • Page 449 Number of Slaves Sets the number of connected Slaves. This is enabled when SyncType is Master or Slave. Sets the position of MG3710A when SyncType is Slave Position Slave. This is enabled when SyncType is or Slave. It is used for setting judgment such as the case Lo Out is set to Off for connection termination.
  • Page 450 Slave. When SG2 is installed, SG1 and SG2 are synchronized. Synchronizes SG1 and SG2 of MG3710A. SG12 Programming Example To set to the mode to synchronizes SG1 and SG2 of MG3710A. RAD:ARB:MBSY SG12 RAD:ARB:MBSY? > SG12 Number of Slaves or Top > Mode ,>...
  • Page 451 Top > Mode, > > Sync Multi SG > Slave Position Sets the position of MG3710A when SyncType is Slave. This is enabled when SyncType is or Slave. It is used for setting judgment such as the case Lo Out is set to Off for connection termination.
  • Page 452 1 to 3 Resolution Default Suffix code None Programming Example To set the position of MG3710A when SyncType is Slave to 2. RAD:ARB:MBSY:SREF 2 RAD:ARB:MBSY:SREF? > 2 Local synchronization: LO Sync or Top > Mode , > > Sync Multi SG > LO Sync Enables/disables the Local synchronization.
  • Page 453 Baseband Mode Remote command Enable/disable the Local synchronization Command [:SOURce]:RADio:ARB:MBSYnc:LOSYnc <boolean> Query [:SOURce]:RADio:ARB:MBSYnc:LOSYnc? Response <boolean> 0 or 1 Parameter Local synchronization On/Off <boolean> Does not execute Local synchronization OFF|0 (Default). Executes Local synchronization. ON|1 Programming Example To set the Local synchronization to On. RAD:ARB:MBSY:LOSY ON RAD:ARB:MBSY:LOSY? >...
  • Page 454 Chapter 7 Modulation Waveform Restart or Top > Mode , > > Sync Multi SG > Waveform Restart Simultaneously restarts each waveform pattern selected by SG1 and SG2 when SG2 (Option 062/162, 064/164 or 066/166) is installed. SG1 and SG2 enter the Waiting-for-Trigger state when the trigger is to be used for Baseband signal output start.
  • Page 455 Baseband Mode I/Q Phase or Top > Mode, > > Sync Multi SG > I/Q Phase Adjusts the Baseband signal IQ phase. This is used to adjust multiple SGs signal phases with MIMO or beam forming. The setting is same as F5 I/Q Phase in Table 7.6.4-1 “Internal Baseband Adjust Function Menu”.
  • Page 456 Chapter 7 Modulation I/Q Delay or Top > Mode ,> > Sync Multi SG > I/Q Delay Adjusts the Baseband signal output timings. This is used when multiple SGs are to be synchronized and timings for signals to reach to DUT are to be adjusted. The setting is same as F7 I/Q Delay in Table 7.6.4-1 “Internal Baseband Adjust Function Menu”.

  • Page 457: Route Connectors

    Top > > Route Connectors Sets signals of the input and output connectors. This setting is common for the entire MG3710A/MG3740A. Press F4 Route Connectors on page 2 of the top function menu to open the Route Connectors function menu.

  • Page 458: Route Input Connectors

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.4.1 Route Input Connectors Top > > Route Connectors > Route Input Connectors Sets signals input to input connectors displayed on the menu. Press F1 Route Input Connectors on the Route Connectors function menu to display the Input Connectors function menu. Table 7.4.1-1 Input Connectors Function Menu Page Menu Display...
  • Page 459 Press F1 to F6 on the Input Connectors function menu to display the Input Connectors function menu. You can set signals in the table below regardless of names of input connectors. Table 7.4.1-2 Input Connector Function Menu (MG3710A, MG3740A installed option-020/120) Page Menu Display Function Handles the input signal as S/F Trigger for SG1.
  • Page 460 Press F1 S/F Trigger in Table 7.4.1-1 “Input Connectors Function Menu” to select the signal. Options Listed in Table 7.4.1-2 “Input Connector Function Menu”. Default SG1 S/F Trigger (MG3710A, MG3740A-020/120) OFF (MG3740A, when MG3740A-020/120 is not installed) Remote command Select the signal input to the S/F Trigger connector Command...
  • Page 461 Refer to the table below. Table 7.4.1-4 Input Connector Parameter Signal to be input Remarks SG1 S/F Trigger Default (MG3710A, MG3740A-020/120) In MG3740A, this cannot be selected when option-020/120 is not installed. SG2 S/F Trigger In MG3740A, this cannot be selected when SG2SFT option-020/120 is not installed.
  • Page 462 Signal input to the Pattern Trigger 1 connector <signal> Options Listed in Table 7.4.1-3 “Input Connector”. Default PT1 (MG3710A, MG3740A-020/120) (MG3740A, when option-020/120 not installed) Programming Example To set the signal input to the Pattern Trigger 1 connector to SG1 S/F Trigger.
  • Page 463 Route Connectors Remote command Select the signal input to the Pattern Trigger 2 connector Command :ROUTe[:CONNectors]:INPut:TRIGger:PATTern2 SFT|SG2SFT|PT1|PT2|PT3|PS1|PM|SG2PM|OFF Query :ROUTe[:CONNectors]:INPut:TRIGger:PATTern2? Response <signal> Parameter Signal input to the Pattern Trigger 2 connector <signal> Options Listed in Table 7.4.1-3 “Input Connector”. Default Programming Example To set the signal input to the Pattern Trigger 2 connector to SG1 S/F Trigger.
  • Page 464 Chapter 7 Modulation Response <signal> Parameter <signal> Signal input to the Pattern Trigger 3 connector Options Listed in Table 7.4.1-3 “Input Connector”. Default Programming Example To set the signal input to the Pattern Trigger 3 connector to SG1 S/F Trigger. ROUT:INP:TRIG:PATT3 SFT ROUT:INP:TRIG:PATT3? >...
  • Page 465 Route Connectors Programming Example To set the signal input to the Pattern Status 1 connector to SG1 S/F Trigger. ROUT:INP:STAT:PATT1 SFT ROUT:INP:STAT:PATT1? > SFT Pulse Mod Top > > Route Connectors > Route Input Connectors > Pulse Mod Selects the signal input to the Pulse Mod connector. Press F6 Pulse Mod in Table 7.4.1-1 “Input Connectors Function Menu”...
  • Page 466 Chapter 7 Modulation Selects the usage of PatternTrig1, 2, 3, and PatternStatus1. In MG3740A, this can be selected only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F7 Pattern Trigger Type on the Input Connectors function menu to select the usage. Shared PatternTrig1,2,3 and PatternStatus1 are handled as the same signal in SG1/2.
  • Page 467 Route Connectors SHARe|DIVide Query :ROUTe[:CONNectors]:INPut:TRIGger:PATTern:TYPE? Response <mode> SHAR or DIV Parameter <mode> Usage of PatternTrig 1, 2, 3, and PatternStatus1 Shared (Default) SHARe Independent DIVide Programming Example To set the usage of PatternTrig 1, 2, 3 and PatternStatus1 to Independent. ROUT:INP:TRIG:PATT:TYPE DIV ROUT:INP:TRIG:PATT:TYPE? >...

  • Page 468: Route Output Connectors

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.4.2 Route Output Connectors Top > > Route Connectors > Route Output Connectors Sets signals output from output connectors displayed on the menu. Press F2 Route Output Connectors on the Route Connectors function menu to display the Output Connectors function menu. Table 7.4.2-1 Output Connectors Function Menu Page Menu Display...
  • Page 469 Route Connectors Table 7.4.2-2 Marker Connector Function Menu (MG3710A, MG3740A installed option-020/120) Page Menu Display Function Outputs SG1 Waveform Memory A side Marker 1 signal. SG1 Marker 1 A Refer to 7.3.12 “Marker Setup”. Outputs SG1 Waveform Memory A side Marker 2 signal.
  • Page 470 Pattern Trigger generators to be synchronized with Pattern Trigger 2 / Pattern 2/Pattern Status 2 input to the MG3710A/MG3740A. Status 2 Refer to 7.3.14 “Pattern Trigger”. Outputs Pattern Trigger 3/Pattern Status 3 signal. This...
  • Page 471 Refer to 7.3.12 “Marker Setup”. Outputs the signal synchronized with SG2 Pulse cycle. This is used when the measurement synchronized with the pulse modulation of the MG3710A/MG3740A is to be executed. SG2 Pulse Sync This is not displayed when the option 062/162, 064/164 or 066/166 is not installed.
  • Page 472 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.4.2-3 Marker Connector Function Menu (MG3740A not installed option-020/120) Page Menu Display Function Outputs the signal synchronized with SG1 Pulse cycle. This is used when the measurement synchronized with the pulse modulation of the MG3740A is to be executed. SG1 Pulse Sync Refer to Figure 7.4.2-3 “SG1/2 Pulse Sync”...
  • Page 473 Route Connectors SG1/2 Marker 1A to 3A: Output level is TTL. Outputs the waveform pattern-defined marker signal or user-defined marker signal. SG1/2 Marker 1B to 3B: Output level is TTL. Outputs the waveform pattern-defined marker signal or user-defined marker signal. Output level is TTL.
  • Page 474 Chapter 7 Modulation Output level is TTL. SG1/2 Pulse Sync: Outputs the signal synchronized with the start position of the pulse modulation cycle. Pulse modulation Positive =TTL High Pulse Sync Negative Figure 7.4.2-3 SG1/2 Pulse Sync Output level is TTL. SG1/2 Pulse Video: Outputs the signal synchronized with the modulated signal of the pulse modulation.
  • Page 475 Press F1 Marker 1 on the Output Connectors function menu to select the signal. Options Listed in Table 7.4.2-2 “Marker Connector Function Menu”. Default SG1 Marker 1 A (MG3710A, MG3740A-020/120) Point Trigger Out (MG3740A, when MG3740A-020/120 is not installed) Remote command Select the signal output from the Marker 1 connector Command...
  • Page 476 Chapter 7 Modulation Table 7.4.2-4 Marker Connector Parameter Signal to be output Remarks Default (MG3710A, MG3740A-020/120) SG1 Marker 1 A In MG3740A, this cannot be selected when option-020/120 is not installed. In MG3740A, this cannot be selected SG1 Marker 2 A when option-020/120 is not installed.
  • Page 477 Route Connectors Programming Example To set the signal output from the Marker 1 connector to SG1 Marker 1 A. ROUT:OUTP:MARK1 M1A ROUT:OUTP:MARK1? > M1A Marker 2 connector: Marker 2 Top > > Route Connectors > Route Output Connectors > Marker 2 Selects the signal output from the Marker 2 connector.
  • Page 478 Chapter 7 Modulation Marker 3 connector: Marker 3 Top > > Route Connectors > Route Output Connectors > Marker 3 Selects the signal output from the Marker 3 connector. In MG3740A, this can be selected only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F3 Marker 3 on the Output Connectors function menu to select the signal.
  • Page 479 Route Connectors Pulse Video Top> > Route Connectors > Route Output Connectors > Pulse Video Selects the signal output from the Pulse Video connector. Press F4 Pulse Video on the Output Connectors function menu to select the signal. Options Listed in Table 7.4.2-2 “Marker Connector Function Menu”.
  • Page 480 Chapter 7 Modulation Pulse Sync Top > > Route Connectors > Route Output Connectors > Pulse Sync Selects the signal output from the Pulse Sync connector. Press F5 Pulse Sync on the Output Connectors function menu to select the signal. Options Listed in Table 7.4.2-2 “Marker Connector Function Menu”.
  • Page 481 Route Connectors Sync Trig Out Top > > Route Connectors > Route Output Connectors > Sync Trig Out Selects the signal output from the Sync Trig Out connector. In MG3740A, this can be selected only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F6 Sync Trig Out on the Output Connectors function menu to select the signal.

  • Page 482: Awgn

    Top > > AWGN Executes the digital-addition of AWGN signal or outputs independently for the selected waveform pattern. This cannot be used in MG3740A. This can be used when AWGN option (MG3710A-049/079/149/179) is installed. RF Output Waveform pattern AWGN Figure 7.5-1 AWGN Addition Function Press F1 AWGN on page 2 of the top function menu to open the AWGN function menu.
  • Page 483 AWGN AWGN On/Off: AWGN Top > > AWGN > AWGN Enables/disables the AWGN addition. Press F1 AWGN on the AWGN function menu to set On/Off. Outputs AWGN. Does not output AWGN (Default). The signal with AWGN added is output when AWGN is On. While the combination of baseband signal (A+B) is being executed, the AWGN cannot be set to On.
  • Page 484 Chapter 7 Modulation Noise Bandwidth Top > > AWGN > Noise Bandwidth Sets the bandwidth of AWGN. Press F2 Noise Bandwidth on the AWGN function menu to set with the Noise Bandwidth dialog box. Range See table below. Note: The table below describes the setting range when it is output with single AWGN.
  • Page 485 Press F3 Carrier Level on the AWGN function menu to set with the Carrier Level dialog box. Same value with Level A. When Level A is changed, also Carrier Level is changed with the same value. And vice versa. Range Output level range of MG3710A Resolution 0.01 dB Default –110.00 dBm...
  • Page 486 Chapter 7 Modulation Programming Example To set the carrier signal level when AWGN is ON to –55.00 dBm. RAD:ARB:NOIS:POW:CARR –55 RAD:ARB:NOIS:POW:CARR? > –55.00 Noise Level Top > > AWGN > Noise Level Sets the noise level of AWGN. The noise level of the noise bandwidth conversion is set when no carrier exists, and the noise level of the carrier bandwidth conversion is set when the carrier exists.
  • Page 487 AWGN Parameter Output level <ampl> Resolution 0.01 dB Default –20 dBm Suffix code DBM, DM, DBUV, DBUVE When omitted: DBM Programming Example To set the AWGN noise level to –30.00 dBm. RAD:ARB:NOIS:POW:NOIS –30.00 RAD:ARB:NOIS:POW:NOIS? > –30.00 C/N Ratio Top > >...
  • Page 488 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter <rel_ampl> Range –40 dB to 40 dB Resolution 0.01 Default 40.00 Suffix code DB, When omitted: DB Details When the RF output level is near the upper limit or lower limit, the settable range may become narrow. Programming Example To set the C/N to 3 dB.
  • Page 489 AWGN Parameter Parameter to be changed <mode> Changes Carrier. CARRier NOISe Changes Noise. Fixes the output level and changes Carrier and TOTal Noise (Default). Programming Example To set the parameter to be changed when C/N is set to AWGN. RAD:ARB:NOIS:POW:CONT NOIS RAD:ARB:NOIS:POW:CONT? >...

  • Page 490: I/Q Modulation

    Table 7.6-1 IQ Function Menu Page Menu Display Function Sets the I/Q signal source. I/Q Source This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. Internal This is not available in MG3740A. I/Q Output Sets the output destination for baseband signals.
  • Page 491 Selects the I/Q signal source for the vector modulation with the external I/Q signal. This can be used only when option-018/118 is installed in MG3710A. This cannot be used in MG3740A. Press F1 I/Q Source on the I/Q function menu to select from the I/Q Source function menu.
  • Page 492 Chapter 7 Modulation The setting procedure for the vector modulation with the external I/Q Operation description signal is described below. Figure 7.6-1 Analog I/Q Input Connector The Analog I/Q Input connectors are internally terminated with 50 Ω. When the effective value voltage of is 0.5 V in the 50 Ω...
  • Page 493 I/Q Modulation Example: To execute the vector modulation with the external I/Q signal. Press F1 I/Q Source on the I/Q function menu to switch F1 Internal to F2 Analog I/Q In . The display for “Src:” is switched to “Analog I/Q In”...
  • Page 494 Chapter 7 Modulation I/Q Output or Top > > I/Q , > I/Q Output Can output the I/Q signal generated at the digital modulation unit from the I/Q signal output connector on the rear panel. This cannot be used in MG3740A. Figure 7.6-5 Analog I/Q Output Connector Select the output destination for the Baseband signal.
  • Page 495 On, the DC voltage of +1 V is output for tens of microseconds during the power activation. Do not turn on the MG3710A/MG3740A while a low-voltage device or others are connected to the I/Q signal output. Press F2 I/Q Output on the I/Q function menu to switch F1 RF to F2 Analog I/Q Out .
  • Page 496 Chapter 7 Modulation Baseband in-band correction: Internal Channel Correction or Top > > I/Q , Internal Channel Correction, or > Internal Channel Correction Enables/disables the baseband in-band correction. This cannot be set in MG3740A. Press F3 Internal Channel Correction on the I/Q function menu to set the correction.
  • Page 497 I/Q Modulation Baseband in-band correction: Wideband or Top > > I/Q, > Wideband Selects the switching mode for RF output bandwidth. This cannot be used in MG3740A. Press F6 Wideband on the I/Q function menu to select the mode. Harmonics distortion characteristic has priority (Default).

  • Page 498: I/Q Calibration

    Chapter 7 Modulation 7.6.1 I/Q Calibration or Top > > I/Q, > I/Q Calibration, or > I/Q Cal Sets the settings related to the I/Q quadrature modulator calibration. Press F5 I/Q Calibration on the I/Q function menu to open the I/Q Calibration Info dialog box and I/Q Calibration function menu.
  • Page 499 I/Q Modulation Remote command Execute the calibration for the I/Q quadrature modulator with the range of all frequencies Command :CALibration[1]|2:IQ:FULL Programming Example To execute the calibration of SG1 for the range of all frequencies. CAL:IQ:FULL Cal Type or Top > >...
  • Page 500 Chapter 7 Modulation Programming Example To set the calibration method for the SG1 I/Q calibration execution to the range of all frequencies. CAL:IQ:TYPE FULL CAL:IQ:TYPE? > FULL Remote command Query the calibration method for the calibration execution Query :CALibration[1]|2:IQ:INFomation:TYPE? Response Calibration method for the I/Q calibration <type>...
  • Page 501 I/Q Modulation Remote command Query the latest time when the calibration has been executed Query :CALibration[1]|2:IQ:INFomation:TIME? Response hh:mm:ss <time> Default 00:00:00 Programming Example To query the time when the calibration for SG1 has been executed. CAL:IQ:INF:TIME? > 01:01:01 Restore Default or Top >...

  • Page 502: Analog I/Q Input Adjustments

    > I/Q, > > Analog I/Q Input Adjustments Adjusts/sets the analog I/Q input. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F1 Analog I/Q Input Adjustments on page 2 of the I/Q function menu to open the Analog I/Q Input Adjust function menu.
  • Page 503 > Analog I/Q Input Adjustments > Q Offset Sets the offset to the Q-phase. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F2 Q Offset on the Analog I/Q Input Adjust function menu to set the offset with the Q Offset dialog box.
  • Page 504 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Set the offset for the Q-phase Command [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal:QOFFset <voltage> Query [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal:QOFFset? Response Unit: V <voltage> Parameter Q-phase offset value <voltage> Range –100 mV to 100 mV Resolution 1 mV Default 0 mV Suffix code V, MV, UV, When omitted: V Programming Example To set the offset for the Q-phase to 50 mV.

  • Page 505: Analog I/Q Output Adjustments

    > I/Q, > > Analog I/Q Output Adjustments Adjusts/sets the analog I/Q output. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F2 Analog I/Q Output Adjustments on page 2 of the I/Q function menu to open the Analog I/Q Output Adjust function menu.
  • Page 506 Chapter 7 Modulation Set the I/Q signal output The I/Q signal output voltage and DC offset can be adjusted. The output voltage is set with the ratio (%) to the output voltage defined with the setting of the digital modulation unit. These voltages are always indicated by open voltage.
  • Page 507 I/Q Modulation Press F1 I level Trimming to display the I level Trimming dialog box. Set “106%” (150/141 × 100 = 106 [%]) to the I level Trimming dialog box. Press F2 Q level Trimming to display the Q level Trimming dialog box.
  • Page 508 > Analog I/Q Output Adjustments > I Level Trimming Adjusts the I-phase output level gain. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F1 I Level Trimming on the Analog I/Q Output Adjust function menu to set with the I Level Trimming dialog box.
  • Page 509 > Analog I/Q Output Adjustments > Q Level Trimming Adjusts the Q-phase output level gain. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F2 Q Level Trimming on the Analog I/Q Output Adjust function menu to set with the Q Level Trimming dialog box.
  • Page 510 > Analog I/Q Output Adjustments > I/Q Common Offset Adjusts the I/Q inphase output DC offset level. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F3 I/Q Common Offset on the Analog I/Q Output Adjust function menu to set with the I/Q Common Offset dialog box.
  • Page 511 > Analog I/Q Output Adjustments > I Diff Offset Adjusts the I-phase differential output DC offset level. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F4 I Diff Offset on the Analog I/Q Output Adjust function menu to set with the I Diff Offset dialog box.
  • Page 512 > Analog I/Q Output Adjustments > Q Diff Offset Adjusts the Q-phase differential output DC offset level. This is available in MG3710A only when option-018/118 is installed. This is not available in MG3740A. Press F5 Q Diff Offset on the Analog I/Q Output Adjust function menu to set with the Q Diff Offset dialog box.

  • Page 513: Internal Baseband Adjustments

    I/Q Modulation 7.6.4 Internal Baseband Adjustments or Top > > I/Q, > > Internal Baseband Adjustments Adjusts the I/Q signal generated in the internal Baseband. In MG3740A, this can be used only when option-020/120 is installed. Press F3 Internal Baseband Adjustments on page 2 of I/Q function menu to open the Internal Baseband Adjustments dialog box and Internal Baseband Adjust function menu.
  • Page 514 Chapter 7 Modulation Remote command Set the DC offset for the I-phase Command [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:IOFFset <percent> Query [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:IOFFset? Response <percent> Parameter DC offset value <percent> Range –20% to 20% Resolution 0.025% Default Suffix code PCT (%), When omitted: PCT Programming Example To adjust the I-phase DC offset to 10%.
  • Page 515 I/Q Modulation Q Offset or Top > > I/Q, > > Internal Baseband Adjustments > Q Offset Sets the DC offset for the Q-phase. Press F2 Q Offset on the Internal Baseband Adjust function menu to set with the Q Offset dialog box. Range –20% to 20% Resolution...
  • Page 516 Chapter 7 Modulation Gain Balance or Top > > I/Q, > > Internal Baseband Adjustments > Gain Balance Adjusts the I/Q phase gain balance. Press F3 Gain Balance on the Internal Baseband Adjust function menu to set with the Gain Balance dialog box. Range –1 dB to 1 dB Resolution...
  • Page 517 I/Q Modulation Programming Example To set the gain balance of I/Q phase to 1 dB. DM:IQAD:GAIN 1 DM:IQAD:GAIN? > 1.000 Quad. Angle or Top > > I/Q, > > Internal Baseband Adjustments > Quad. Angle Adjusts the quadrature angle of I/Q phase. Press F4 Quad.
  • Page 518 Chapter 7 Modulation Parameter Quadrature angle of the I/Q phase <angle> Range –10 deg to 10 deg Resolution 0.01 deg Default 0 deg Suffix code DEG, When omitted: DEG Programming Example To adjust the quadrature angle of I/Q phase to 90 deg + 5 deg. DM:IQAD:QSK 5 DM:IQAD:QSK? >...
  • Page 519 I/Q Modulation Programming Example To set the Baseband signal IQ phase to 5 deg. DM:IQAD:PHAS 5 DM:IQAD:PHAS? > 5.00 I/Q time difference: I/Q Skew or Top > > I/Q, > > Internal Baseband Adjustments > I/Q Skew Adjusts the I/Q phase time difference (timing). Press F6 I/Q Skew on the Internal Baseband Adjust function menu to set with the I/Q Skew dialog box.
  • Page 520 Chapter 7 Modulation I/Q Delay or Top > > I/Q, > > Internal Baseband Adjustments > I/Q Delay Adjusts the Baseband signal output timing. This is used when multiple SGs are to be synchronized and timings for signals to reach to DUT are to be adjusted. The setting is same as F8 I/Q Delay in Table 7.3.15-1 “Sync Multi SG Function Menu”.

  • Page 521: Chapter 8 Ber Measurement

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement This chapter describes the operations and screen display of the BER measurement function. Note on remote command: When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions. Refer to Appendix E, 7.6 “Selecting SG1/2”...

  • Page 522: Function, Performance, And Communication

    Bit Error Rates (BER) of externally input signals. To switch the MG3710A/MG3740A to the BER measurement mode, press Aux Fnct on the main function menu or press F5 Auxiliary on page 2 of the top function menu to display the Auxiliary function menu, and press F2 BER .
  • Page 523 Probabilities of synchronization For PN signals on the MG3710A/MG3740A, the synchronization establishing condition is (PN order × 2) bit continuous error free. For PN signals including random errors, probabilities of a section in which (PN order ×...
  • Page 524 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Display Status, Error Rate, Error Count, SyncLoss Count, number of measurement bits Measurement result clearing function This function can start the measurement from 0 by clearing the measurement values while keeping synchronization during the BER measurement.
  • Page 525 Function, Performance, and Communication 8.1.2 External connection BER measurement requires signals to be input externally. The signals are input via the AUX connector on the rear panel. Refer to Table 3.1.2-1 “AUX Connectors”. Figure 8.1.2-1 BER Measurement Input Connector BER measurement uses three terminals of the AUX connectors: •...

  • Page 526: Display Description

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.2 Display Description This section describes display items of the BER measurement function. 8.2.1 BER dialog box or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER Press Aux Fnct on the main function menu or F5 Auxiliary on page 2 of the top function menu to display the Auxiliary function menu.
  • Page 527 Display Description Status Indicates the status of the BER measurement. Table 8.2.1-2 Measurement Status Display Description Stop Measurement stopped. Synchronizing Synchronization is being established. Measuring Measurement is in progress. OverflowDataCount Measurement stopped because the number of measurement bits exceeded the maximum value (2 - 1 bit).
  • Page 528 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Error Indicates the error information of the BER measurement. Table 8.2.1-3 Explanation of Errors Display Description Bit Error An error bit occurred. SyncLoss SyncLoss occurred. ClockError The input clock signal was abnormal. EnableError The input enable signal was abnormal. Remote command Query the error information of the BER measurement Query...
  • Page 529 Display Description Details 0 is returned if both SG and BER operate normally. Programming Example To query the current operation status. BERT:ERR? > 0 SyncLoss Count Displays a Sync Loss count of the BER measurement. Remote command Query a Sync Loss count of the BER measurement Query [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASeband]:SYNLoss:COUNt? Response...
  • Page 530 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Remote command Query the bit error rate of the BER measurement function Query :FETCh:BERT:ERRor:RATE? EP|ER Response <rate> Parameter Returns the bit error rate in percentage. Returns the bit error rate as an index. Value of the bit error rate <rate>...
  • Page 531 Display Description Number of measurement bits: Data Count Displays the number of measurement bits of the BER measurement. Remote command Query the number of measurement bits of the BER measurement Query :FETCh:BERT:DATA:COUNt? Response <bit> Parameter <bit> Number of measurement bits Range 0 to 2 –1 bit...

  • Page 532: Performing Ber Measurement

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.3 Performing BER Measurement or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER Use the BER function menu to set and perform the BER measurement. Following the explanation in 8.1.2 “External connection”, input signals externally. Use F4 Measure Mode to select a mode for the BER measurement. Use F5 Count Mode to set the measurement end conditions.
  • Page 533 Performing BER Measurement Table 8.3-1 BER Function Menu (Cont’d) Page Key No. Menu Display Function Resync Sets the automatic resynchronization function. Condition Refer to 8.3.5 “Resync Condition”. BER Interface Sets the interface for the BER measurement. Refer to 8.3.6 “BER Interface”. Show Log Displays, saves, or deletes a log of the BER measurement result.

  • Page 534: Starting/Stopping Ber Measurement

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.3.1 Starting/stopping BER measurement Start BER Test or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > Start BER Test Starts the BER measurement. Press F1 Start BER Test to start the BER measurement. If this is pressed during measurement, measurement values obtained during measurement are cleared and nothing remains in the log.
  • Page 535 The BER measurement continues even if you navigate to other screens during the BER measurement. When you turn the power off and restart the MG3710A/MG3740A during measurement, the BER measurement becomes the stop status. When 40 Mbps signals are measured, the result reaches the upper limit of bit count at the longest 107.4 seconds or so, and the measurement...
  • Page 536 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Clear BER Count or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > Clear BER Count Clears the result of the BER measurement. Press F3 Clear BER Count to clear the result of the BER measurement. This is not available when Measurement Mode is Continuous. Remote command Clear the result of the BER measurement Command...
  • Page 537 Performing BER Measurement Press F3 Clear BER Count . When the key is pressed, the number of count bits is 35612, but the “0 bit” is displayed. Start Press Count Clear Bit display: 0 Bit When the measurement finishes, the total count bit is 100000 bits, but the “64388 bit”...
  • Page 538 Chapter 8 BER Measurement BERT:RST:AUTO ON BERT:RST:AUTO? > 1 8-18...

  • Page 539: Measure Mode

    Performing BER Measurement 8.3.2 Measure Mode or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > Measure Mode Selects a mode for the BER measurement. Press F4 Measure Mode to display the Measure Mode function menu to select a measurement mode. Single Measures selected data patterns until a result reaches the specified number of bits or the specified number of error bits.
  • Page 540 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Operation description Display the BER measurement mode Displayed measurement results by BER measurement modes are shown below. Refer to Figure 8.2.1-1 “BER Dialog Box” for displayed status and error rates during measurement. When Measure Mode is Continuous: Status, Error, and Sync Loss Count are updated as required during measurement.

  • Page 541: Measurement End Conditions: Count Mode

    Performing BER Measurement 8.3.3 Measurement end conditions: Count Mode or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > Count Mode Sets the measurement end conditions. This function is not available when Measure Mode is set to Endless. Press F5 Count Mode to display the BER Count mode function menu to set the measurement end conditions.
  • Page 542 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Programming Example To set the Count mode to the number of measurement bits. BERT:STOP:CRIT NONE BERT:STOP:CRIT? > NONE Setting the number of measurement bits: Data or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > Count Mode > Data Sets the number of measurement bits when Count Mode is Data.
  • Page 543 Performing BER Measurement Setting the number of measurement error bits: Error or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > Count Mode > Error Sets the number of measurement error bits when Count Mode is Error. This function is not available if Measure Mode is set to Endless. Press F3 Error on the Count mode function menu to specify the number of measurement error bits in the Error dialog box.

  • Page 544: Data Type

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.3.4 Data Type or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > Data Type Select a data type. Press F6 Data Type to display the Data type function menu to select a data pattern for the measurement. Use to display page 2.
  • Page 545 Performing BER Measurement Programming Example To set the data pattern for measurement to PN23. BERT:PRBS PN23 BERT:PRBS? > PN23 8-25...

  • Page 546: Resync Condition

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.3.5 Resync Condition or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > > Resync Condition Sets the automatic resynchronization function. Press to display page 2 of the BER function menu. Press F1 Resync Condition to display the Resync Condition function menu and set the automatic resynchronization function for the BER measurement.
  • Page 547 The default threshold values of the MD6420A: 200/512 The specified threshold values of the MT8820A (WCDMA) BER function: 23/64 There are differences between Auto Resync on the MG3710A/MG3740A and Auto Sync on the MP1201C or MD6420A. Details of Auto Resync on the MG3710A/MG3740A...
  • Page 548 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Auto Resync Off The MG3710A/MG3740A performs synchronization when it starts measurement. It starts measurement after the synchronization is established. SyncLoss is not detected during measurement. Start Sync. established Synchroniz Measure Figure 8.3.5-2 Auto Resync Off Details of Auto Sync on the MP1201C or MD6420A...
  • Page 549 Performing BER Measurement Note: To get BER curve, set Auto Sync to On and establish synchronization in good S/N condition, and then change Auto Sync to Off and perform measurement with varying S/N. Auto Resync or Top > > Auxiliary, > BER > >...
  • Page 550 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Conditions for detecting Sync Loss: Threshold X, Threshold Y Threshold X or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > > Resync Condition > Threshold X Sets conditions for detecting Sync Loss of the BER measurement. Set values of X and Y so that when X bits in Y bits become error, it is determined that SyncLoss occurred.
  • Page 551 Performing BER Measurement Programming Example To set conditions for determining Sync Loss to 123/500 bits. BERT:RSYN:THR 123,500 BERT:RSYN:THR? > 123,500 Operations when detecting Sync Loss: at SyncLoss or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > > Resync Condition > at SyncLoss Specifies to clear or hold the measurement results when a SyncLoss is detected.

  • Page 552: Ber Interface

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.3.6 BER Interface or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > > BER Interface Sets input signals for the BER measurement. Press to display page 2 of the BER function menu. Press F2 BER Interface to display the BER Interface function menu to set an input interface for the BER measurement.
  • Page 553 Performing BER Measurement Parameter Detection edge of Clock signals <mode> Detects Data at the rising edge of Clock signals POSitive (Default). Detects Data at the falling edge of Clock signals. NEGative Programming Example To specify to detect Data at the rising edge of Clock signals. INP:BERT:CLOC:POL POS INP:BERT:CLOC:POL? >...
  • Page 554 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Enable Active or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > > Resync Condition > BER Interface > Enable Active Sets the logic for Enable signals of the BER measurement. Press F3 Enable Active on the BER Interface function menu to select a value on the Enable Active function menu.

  • Page 555: Pn Fix Pattern

    PN Fix Pattern 8.4 PN Fix Pattern For the BER measurement, you can use special PN patterns known as PN_Fix patterns. The PN_Fix pattern is a pattern consisting of repeated parts of PN patterns and PN patterns with length shorter than 1 cycle. PNx * N (N = 0, 1, 2, ...) PNx not …...

  • Page 556: Setting Pn_Fix Pattern：pn Fix Pattern

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.4.1 Setting PN_Fix Pattern：PN Fix Pattern or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > PN Fix Pattern Sets a PN_Fix pattern. A PN_Fix pattern can be set when PN9Fix, PN11Fix, PN15Fix, PN20Fix, or PN23Fix is selected for Data Type. Press F7 PN Fix Pattern on the BER function menu to display the PN Fix Pattern function menu and set a PN Fix pattern.
  • Page 557 PN Fix Pattern Remote command Set an initial pattern of PN_Fix patterns Command [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASeband]:PRBS:PNFix:INITial <binary> Query [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASeband]:PRBS:PNFix:INITial? Response <binary> Parameter <binary> Based on Table 8.4.1-2 “Initial Pattern Setting Value”. Details You can set patterns using this function only when PN Fix pattern is selected for Data Type.
  • Page 558 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Remote command Set a length of PN_Fix patterns Command [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASeband]:PRBS:PNFix:LENGth <ext_integer> Query [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASeband]:PRBS:PNFix:LENGth? Response <ext_integer> Parameter <ext_integer> Based on Table 8.4.1-3 “Setting Range”. Details You can set patterns using this function only when PN Fix pattern is selected for Data Type.

  • Page 559: Synchronization Establishing Conditions Of Pn_Fix Patterns

    PN Fix Pattern 8.4.2 Synchronization establishing conditions of PN_Fix patterns This section describes synchronization establishing conditions of PN_Fix patterns. Assumptions: x: PN order(If PN9, x = 9) Synchronization is established in 3 phases: Establish synchronization with PN patterns by detecting (x × 2) bit error free.
  • Page 560 Chapter 8 BER Measurement 1. Detect 18 bit error free Start (PN9 synchronization establishing condition) PN9 not completed (511 bit) (511 bit) (200 bit) PN9Fix 1 cycle Discontinuity 2. Detect discontinuity PN9 not completed (511 bit) (511 bit) (200 bit) 3.

  • Page 561: Examples Of Using Pn_Fix Patterns

    However, on a signal generator using a waveform generator like the MG3710A/MG3740A, increasing frames and samples of waveform patterns may decrease patterns stored in the waveform memory, or may cause over capacity of waveform memory.
  • Page 562 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Clock, Data, Enable Waveform pattern RF or I/Q signal (PN_Fix data) Figure 8.4.3-2 BER Measurement with PN_Fix Data 8-42...

  • Page 563: User Defined Pattern

    You can create user defined patterns in text file formats using PCs. Load the file from USB memories or internal hard disks of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Following the explanation below, create a file and specify “*.bpn” as an extension. Table 8.5-1 lists items that can be included in user defined patterns.
  • Page 564 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Example 2: #UserPattern Start 0000 0000 1111 1111 #mark001 0101 0101 #mark002 1111 1111 0000 0000 8-44...

  • Page 565: Displaying User Defined Patterns

    User Defined Pattern 8.5.1 Displaying user defined patterns or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > User Pattern To use user defined patterns, press F6 Data Type on the BERTEST function menu and select F6 User Defined on page 2 of the BERDataType function menu.
  • Page 566 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Pattern File Name Displays a loaded user defined pattern name of the BER measurement. Remote command Query a loaded user defined pattern name of the BER measurement Query [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASeband]:PRBS:USER:PATTern? Response <pattern>,<drive> Details If there is no user defined pattern file, the command returns ***. Parameter User defined pattern file name <pattern>...
  • Page 567 User Defined Pattern Programming Example To query the pattern length of the user defined pattern. BERT:PRBS:USER:LENG? > 1024 Bit string of user defined pattern: User Defined Pattern Displays a bit string of a user defined pattern for the BER measurement. Remote command Query a bit string of a user defined pattern for the BER measurement Query...

  • Page 568: Setting User Defined Patterns: User Pattern

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.5.2 Setting user defined patterns: User Pattern or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > User Pattern Loads and sets user defined patterns. Select User Defined on the Data Type function menu, and then press F8 User Pattern .
  • Page 569 User Defined Pattern Setting the start bit: Sync Start or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > User Pattern > Sync Start Sets the start bit of the part for judging the synchronization establishment. Press F1 Sync Start on the User Pattern function menu to set a length to set the start bit of the part for judging the synchronization establishment in the Sync Start dialog box.
  • Page 570 Chapter 8 BER Measurement Sync Length or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > User Pattern > Sync Length Sets a length to determine if synchronization is established. Press F2 Sync Length on the User Pattern function menu to set a length to determine if synchronization is established in the Sync Length dialog box.

  • Page 571: Loading User Defined Patterns: Open

    > Auxiliary， > BER > User Pattern > Open Loads user defined patterns for the BER measurement. Place user defined pattern files directly below the specified USB memories or Hard Disk (internal hard disk) (Root) or [Device]:\Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\BERT BitPattern\. Remote command Load a user defined pattern Command :MMEMory:LOAD:BERT:PATTern <string>[,<device>]...
  • Page 572 Figure 8.5.3-1 User Pattern Open Dialog Box and File List When selecting files, only files with the extension “bpn” are displayed. Place user defined pattern files in: [Device]:\Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\BERT BitPattern\ File names starting with numbers are displayed, and after that those starting with alphabets are displayed.
  • Page 573 User Defined Pattern If no user defined pattern file exists, “File not found” is displayed. If no user defined pattern file exists, the “No file to read” is displayed. If the length of user defined patterns are out of available range, the following errors are displayed: Less than 8 bits “Bit pattern is too short.”...

  • Page 574: Ber Log

    Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8.6 BER Log or Top > > Auxiliary， > BER > > Show Log Displays the past results of the BER measurement and saves them as files. Press to display page 2 of the BER function menu and press F3 Show Log to display BER Test Log.
  • Page 575 BER Log Table 8.6-2 End Reasons Display Description Indicates that the specified bits or error bits were exceeded and the test completed successfully. STOP Indicates that you pressed F2 Stop BER Test to stop the measurement or specified parameters and the measurement stopped.
  • Page 576 Key No. Menu Display Function Deletes logs stored in the memory. Turning the power of the MG3710A/MG3740A off also deletes logs. Clear Refer to 8.6.1 “Deleting BER logs: Clear”. Saves BER Test Log as a file in the text format.

  • Page 577: Deleting Ber Logs: Clear

    > Show Log > Clear Deletes logs of the BER measurement. Press F1 Clear on the BER Log function menu to delete logs stored in the memory. Turning the power of the MG3710A/MG3740A off also deletes logs. Remote command Delete logs of the BER measurement...

  • Page 578: Saving Ber Logs: Save

    A destination path to save the file is the following directory in the specified drive. Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\BERT Log\ Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 579 When you input a file name, an extension is automatically added. You cannot specify an extension. The maximum 100 characters are allowed for a file name. Destination path: Anritsu\MG3710A\UserData\BERT Log\ Default destination name: Bert_[Date]_[Additional number].csv The additional number will be the minimum three-digit numerical number within 000 to 999 which does not exist.
  • Page 580 Chapter 8 BER Measurement A space or dot “.” at the beginning or the end of a file name causes a file name error, and the file cannot be saved. Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.

  • Page 581: About Ber Measurement Operations

    About BER Measurement Operations 8.7 About BER Measurement Operations This section describes the BER measurement operations from synchronization to finishing. Auto Resync Off: Overview of the measurement operations when Auto Resync is set to Off is as follows: In this mode, an error rate is checked immediately after synchronization to determine if the synchronization failed.
  • Page 582 Chapter 8 BER Measurement BER measurement start Synchronize Sync. established ＊ Synchronizing display Sync. checked ＊ Sync. failed Sync. check cleared Count Measuring display Check end condition ＊ Continue Stop measurement Stop display Check Measure Mode Continuous Single Endless Figure 8.7-1 Auto Resync Off 8-62...
  • Page 583 About BER Measurement Operations *1: If the number of measurement bits is less than 1000 bits and the measurement finishes, an error rate is not checked. The measurement result, therefore, may not be correct. *2: If the error rate is 30% or more and the number of measurement bits is 1000 or more, it is determined that synchronization failed.
  • Page 584 Chapter 8 BER Measurement BER measurement start Syncronizing Synchronize display Sync. established Receive bits required for SyncLoss condition check ＊ Check SyncLoss SyncLoss Measuring display Count Check end condition ＊ Continue Stop measurement Stop Check display Measure Mode Continuous Single Endless Figure 8.7-2 Auto Resync On 8-64...
  • Page 585 About BER Measurement Operations *1: To check SyncLoss conditions, bits specified with the denominator of SyncLoss Threshold must be received. Therefore, it may take time to start counting after synchronization is established. *2: When a SyncLoss occurs, the operation specified with at SyncLoss is performed.
  • Page 586 Chapter 8 BER Measurement 8-66.

  • Page 587: Chapter 9 Other Functions

    Chapter 9 Other Functions This chapter describes other functions such as Auxiliary, Utility, and panel key functions. Note on remote command: When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions. Refer to Appendix E, 7.6 “Selecting SG1/2”...

  • Page 588: Auxiliary Function

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.1 Auxiliary Function or Top > > Auxiliary Press Aux Fctn on the main function key or F5 Auxiliary on page 2 of the top function menu to display the Auxiliary function menu. On this menu, you can set Power Meter, the BER measurement, and Alarm History.

  • Page 589: Power Meter

    9.2 Power Meter or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter You can connect two USB power sensors to the MG3710A/MG3740A, simultaneously control them, and show their measurement values individually. The two power sensor measurements are displayed at Ch. A and Ch. B of the power meter.
  • Page 590 Chapter 9 Other Functions Measurement value Indicates a measurement value of a power sensor. When a power sensor is on, this value is updated constantly. It includes a level offset. Remote command Query the power sensor measurement display value Query :SYSTem:PMETer[1]|2:MEASuer? Response <power>...
  • Page 591 Power Meter Connection Displays the connection status of power sensor. Power sensor is turned off. (Default) Power sensor is turned on and measuring Connected Power sensor is turned on but not measuring. Disconnected (Disconnected) Remote command Querying the power sensor connection status Query :SYSTem:PMETer[1]|2:CONNection? Response...
  • Page 592 Chapter 9 Other Functions Information about the connection and measurement results are displayed in the resident frame below the function display frame. Figure 9.2-2 Power Meter in Resident Frame Table 9.2-2 Power Meter in Resident Frame Display Description Connection status or a measurement value of Ch. Connection status or a measurement value of Ch.
  • Page 593 Power Meter Remote command Enable/disable measurement performed by Channel A or Channel B power sensor Command :SYSTem:PMETer[1]|2[:STATe] <boolean> Query :SYSTem:PMETer[1]|2[:STATe]? Response <boolean> 0 or 1 Parameter Measurement On/Off <boolean> ON|1 Measures. Does not measure (Default). OFF|0 Details As for node :PMETer[1]|2 , select Ch. A or B of power meter. Set as follows: Ch.

  • Page 594: Power Meter Setting：channel A/B Setup

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.2.1 Power Meter setting：Channel A/B Setup or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup Press F2 Channel A Set up or F4 Channel B Setup on the Power Meter function menu to display the Ch A/B Setup function menu.
  • Page 595 MG3710A/MG3740A. CAUTION The power sensor may be damaged depending on the output level of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Beware not to apply excessive input when the terminal is connected. Perform ZeroSensor. While the Zero adjustment is in progress, the RF Output of the...

  • Page 596: Setting Connection To Power Meters : Connection Settings

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.2.2 Setting connection to power meters : Connection Settings or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup, > Connection Settings Sets the connection to power meters. Press F1 Connection Settings on the Ch A/B Setup function menu to display the Ch A/B Connection function menu.
  • Page 597 If Windows Device Manager does not display the available USB power sensor, the older version of PowerXpert software may be the cause. Download and install the latest PowerXpert software from Anritsu website. Use PowerXpert Ver. 2.11 or later for MA24105A, use PowerXpert Ver.
  • Page 598 Chapter 9 Other Functions Remote command Select the model name for the power sensor Command :SYSTem:PMETer[1]|2:SENSe:MODel MA24104A|MA24105A|MA24106A|MA24108A|MA24118A|MA24126A Query :SYSTem:PMETer[1]|2:SENSe:MODel? Response <model> Parameter Model name of power sensor <model> Options MA24104A, MA24105A, MA24106A (Default), MA24108A, MA24118A, MA24126A Details As for node :PMETer[1]|2 , select Ch. A or B of power meter. Set as follows: Ch.

  • Page 599: Power Meter Setting: Channel Settings

    Power Meter 9.2.3 Power Meter setting: Channel Settings or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup, > Channel Settings Performs the measurement-related settings. Press F2 Channel Settings on the Ch A/B Setup function menu to display the Ch A/B Settings function menu.
  • Page 600 Chapter 9 Other Functions Channel Freq or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup, > Channel Settings > Channel Freq Sets a measurement frequency for the power sensor. Press F1 Channel Freq on the Ch A/B Settings function menu to display the Channel Freq dialog box.
  • Page 601 Power Meter Details As for node :PMETer[1]|2 , select Ch. A or B of power meter. Set as follows: Ch. A: :PMETer1 or:PMETer Ch. B: :PMETer2 Programming Example To set a measurement frequency of Ch. B to 800 MHz. SYST:PMET2:SENS:FREQ 800000000 SYST:PMET2:SENS:FREQ? >...
  • Page 602 Chapter 9 Other Functions Programming Example To set a level offset for the Ch. B power sensor to ON. SYST:PMET2:SENS:CORR:GAIN2:STAT ON SYST:PMET2:SENS:CORR:GAIN2:STAT? > 1 Channel Offset Value or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup, >...
  • Page 603 Power Meter Programming Example To set an offset level for the Ch. B power sensor to -15.00 dB. SYST:PMET2:SENS:CORR:GAIN2 –15.00 SYST:PMET2:SENS:CORR:GAIN2? > –15.00 Averaging or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup, > Channel Settings > Averaging Enables/disables the averaging for the measurement value with the power sensor.
  • Page 604 Chapter 9 Other Functions Averaging Count Value or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup, > Channel Settings > Averaging Count Value Sets the averaging count for the measurement values with the power sensor. Press F5 Averaging Count Value on the Ch A/B Settings function menu to display the Averaging Count Value dialog box.
  • Page 605 Power Meter Measurement Units or Top > > Auxiliary, > Power Meter > Channel A Setup or Channel B Setup, > Channel Settings > Measurements Units Sets a unit to be used for displaying the value measured by the power sensor.

  • Page 606: Alarm History

    9.3 Alarm History or Top > > Auxiliary, > Alarm History The MG3710A/MG3740A can store occurred alarm histories up to 100 in files. Press F4 Alarm History on the Auxiliary function menu to display the Alarm History dialog box and the Alarm History function menu.

  • Page 607: Saving Alarm History: Save

    Top > > Auxiliary, > Alarm History > Save : When an error occurs during operation of the MG3710A/MG3740A, an alarm is displayed, describing details. The alarm is kept as Alarm History. Using this function, you can save histories of alarms.
  • Page 608 Chapter 9 Other Functions Operation method Example: To name the currently displayed file as "Alarm20110624_000" and save it. Press F8 Save on the Alarm History function menu to display the Alarm Save dialog box on the active function menu, the File List dialog box in the function display frame, and the Alarm Save function menu in the function menu frame.
  • Page 609 When you input a file name, an extension is automatically added. You cannot specify an extension. The maximum 100 characters are allowed for a file name. Destination path: Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\Alarm History\ Default destination name: Alarm[Date]_[Additional number].log The additional number will be the minimum three-digit numerical number within 000 to 999 which does not exist.

  • Page 610: Utility Function

    MG3710A/MG3740A becomes the utility setting mode and displays the Utility function menu. On this menu, you can save or call parameters or set networks and other functions. This section assumes that the MG3710A/MG3740A is in the utility setting mode, unless otherwise explained. Table 9.4-1 Utility Function Menu Page Key No.

  • Page 611: Interface Settings

    Top > > Utility, > Interface Settings The MG3710A/MG3740A allows the remote control with GPIB, Ethernet, and USB. Press F1 Interface Settings on the Utility function menu to display the Interface Settings function menu. Set the interface for remote control.
  • Page 612 Chapter 9 Other Functions Parameter GPIB address <ext_integer> Setting range 1 to 30 Default Resolution Programming Example To set GPIB Address to 2. SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 2 SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR? > 2 Terminator or Top > > Utility, > Interface Settings > Terminator Sets a terminator (end code) for a response message of controller sending, which is sent by a measuring instrument via remote control.
  • Page 613 Utility Function Selecting control language: Language or Top > > Utility, > Interface Settings > Language Selects a language mode during remote control. Press F3 Language on the Interface Settings function menu to select an assignment from options displayed on the function menu. SCPI Sets a language mode to SCPI mode (Default).
  • Page 614 Number Specifies a TCP/IP port number for transmitting the waveform data from IQproducer, which locates on an external PC, to the MG3710A/MG3740A. Press F4 Raw Socket Port Number on the Interface Settings function menu to display the Raw Socket Port Number dialog box in the active function frame.

  • Page 615: System Settings

    Utility Function 9.4.2 System Settings or Top > > Utility, > System Settings Press F2 System Settings on the Utility function menu to display the System Setting function menu. Set common items in the system. Table 9.4.2-1 System Settings Function Menu Page Key No.
  • Page 616 Chapter 9 Other Functions Parameters at power-on: Power On or Top > > Utility, > System Setting > Power On Specifies status of parameters when the power is on. Press F3 Power On of the System Setting function menu to set the status.

  • Page 617: Instrument Info

    Utility Function 9.4.3 Instrument Info or Top > > Utility, > Instrument Info Press F3 Instrument Info on the Utility function menu to display the Instrument Info function menu. This function displays the status and factory shipment defaults of the system. Table 9.4.3-1 Instrument Info Function Menu Page Key No.
  • Page 618 *IDN? Response company,model,serialnumber,firmware Parameter Manufacturer (ANRITSU) company Product model name (7 alphanumeric model characters) Serial number specific to the product (10-digit serialnumber numbers) Version number of this application firmware Programming Example To query the device information. *IDN? > ANRITSU,MG3710A,6100000000,1.00.00. 9-32...
  • Page 619 Query the Product Type (product model name) Query :SYSTem:INFormation:MODel? Response <model> Parameter Product model name <model> Programming Example To query the product model name. SYST:INF:MOD? > MG3710A Remote command Query Product Name (product name) Query :SYSTem:INFormation:TYPE? Response <type> Parameter Product name <type> Programming Example To query the product name.
  • Page 620 Chapter 9 Other Functions Remote command Query Running Time (available time) Query :SYSTem:INFormation:RTIMe? Response <time> Parameter Running time <time> Suffix code None, Unit: m (minutes) Programming Example To query the running time. SYST:INF:RTIM? > 100 Remote command Query Firmware Version (the version of this application) Refer to the explanation of "...
  • Page 621 Utility Function Programming Example To query the option information. SYST:HARD:OPT:CAT? > 1,001,ON,Rubidium Reference Oscillator Board Info or Top > > Utility, > Instrument Info > Board Info Displays Revision of the system board. Press F3 Board Info on the Instrument Info function menu to display the Board Information dialog box in the function display frame.
  • Page 622 Chapter 9 Other Functions Details This command queries the revision number of the specified hardware. “-” is returned when reading a version number of hardware not installed. To query in batch all hardware names and revision numbers, use: :SYSTem:HARDware:REVision:CATalog? Programming Example To query the revision number of Main Board.
  • Page 623 Utility Function FPGA Info or Top > > Utility, > Instrument Info > FPGA Info Displays FPGA Version of the system. Press F4 FPGA Info on the Instrument Info function menu to display the FPGA Info dialog box in the function display frame. Name FPGA name Board...
  • Page 624 Chapter 9 Other Functions Remote command Query the version numbers of all FPGAs Query :SYSTem:FPGA:VERSion:CATalog? Response <hardware1>,<version1>,<hardware2>,<version2>... Parameter FPGA type <hardware> ControlPldAndPanel ControlPldAndPanel HardwareControlFpga HardwareControlFpga MeasureComDsp MeasureComDsp MeasureCoreFpga MeasureCoreFpga MeasurePciFpga MeasurePciFpga SgBbHardwareControlFpga SgBbHardwareControlFpga SgControlFpga SgControlFpga SgRfFpga SgRfFpga <version> Version number of FPGA Details This command queries the version number of all FPGAs.
  • Page 625 Utility Function Waveform Licenses or Top > > Utility, > Instrument Info > Waveform Licenses Displays waveform licenses. Press F5 Waveform Licenses on the Instrument Info function menu to display the Waveform Licenses dialog box and the Waveform Licenses function menu. License Name Names of waveform licenses Serial Number...
  • Page 626 Chapter 9 Other Functions Parameter Number <integer> Setting range 0 to (license count – 1) Resolution License name of the waveform license <string> Character string within 100 characters enclosed by double quotes (" ") or single quotes (' ') (excluding extension) Programming Example To query the license name of waveform license with #5.
  • Page 627 Utility Function Remote command Install a waveform license by specifying a license file Command :SYSTem:WAVeform:LICense:INSTall <string>[,<device>] Parameter Name of a license file <string> Character string within 100 characters enclosed by double quotes (" ") or single quotes (' ') (excluding extension) Drive number: A to Z, currently selected drive <device>...
  • Page 628 Chapter 9 Other Functions When Waveform License Install is selected from the dialog box and F7 Install is pressed, the Confirmation function menu is displayed. Table 9.4.3-4 Confirmation Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Function Display Confirm Performs installation. installation Cancel Returns to the menu before this menu is opened.

  • Page 629: Install

    Copy the installer file “Setup.msi” and “update.bat ” to a root folder on any drives or to the following folder: [Drive] \Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\Install Press F1 Firmware on the Install function menu to display the Firmware Install function menu and the Installer List dialog box.
  • Page 630 Chapter 9 Other Functions Table 9.4.4-3 Confirmation Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Function Display Confirm Performs installation. installation Cancel Returns to the previous menu. Press F7 Confirm installation . Install is performed after quitting the application and uninstalling. Then a restart is performed; this all occurs automatically. Note: When installing the firmware, “Now Processing”...
  • Page 631 Utility Function Adding options: Options or Top > > Utility, > Install > Options Adds options. Press F3 Options on the Install function menu to display the Option Install dialog box and the Option Install function menu. Number Number of the option Name Name of the option State...
  • Page 632 Any folders excluding Waveform in the UserData folder created by the MG3710A/MG3740A are deleted, and a reboot is executed after the following processings are executed. • I/Q Calibration Restore Default Setting •...
  • Page 633 Utility Function Confirm Reset To Factory Default or Top > > Utility, > Install > Factory Preset > Confirm Reset To Factory Default Performs Factory Preset and initialize parameters to the level at which past status does not affect operations at all. Remote command Initialize parameters to the level at which past status does not affect operations at all...

  • Page 634: Displaying Error Information: Error Info

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.4.5 Displaying Error Information: Error Info or Top > > Utility, > Error Info Displays the error information. Refer to Appendix B “Error Messages”. Note: The Error Queue dialog box displays the most recent 30 screen operation errors.
  • Page 635 Utility Function Remote command To read remote control error code Query :SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]? Response Error code number <code> “0” returns where there is no error. Programming Example SYST:ERR:CODE? > 0 Remote command Select the mode to display error messages when an error occurs during remote control Command :DISPlay:ERRor:MODE NORMal|REMain|LAST...
  • Page 636 Chapter 9 Other Functions Table 9.4.5-1 Error Info Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Function Display Clear Deletes error information. Deleting Error Information: Clear or Top > > Utility, > Error Info > Clear Deletes the error information. 9-50...

  • Page 637: Changing Boot Loader Service

    Remove Programs. (For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Uninstall a program.) Select “Anritsu Boot Loader Service for MG3710A” and delete it. Connect a USB memory stick to the external PC and copy the installer file for the Boot Loader Service to be updated to the root folder of the USB memory stick.

  • Page 638: Panel Keys

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.5 Panel Keys This section describes functions available only from keys on the front panel. 9.5.1 Preset Press Preset of the panel key to display the Preset function menu. Table 9.5.1-1 Preset Function Menu Page Key No. Menu Function Display...
  • Page 639 Panel Keys Remote command Initialize the settings and status of the currently selected application Command :SYSTem:PRESet Programming Example To initialize the settings and status of the currently selected application. SYST:PRES Preset All > Preset All Resets parameters managed by this application to default values, including those of the Utility function.
  • Page 640 Chapter 9 Other Functions Remote command Restart Command :SYSTem:REBoot Details This function turns the power OFF and executes restart. It resets Remote/Local to Local, Display On/Off to On, SignalGenerator function menu to the default values, and IEEE488. 2 event status processing to the power on-equivalent.

  • Page 641: Switching Remote/Local: Local

    Panel Keys 9.5.2 Switching Remote/Local: Local When you press Local of the panel key, the remote-control state is changed to the local-control state. Then, the lit Remote LED (Remote) goes off (Local). Remote command Switch the remote-control state to the local-control state Command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GTLocal Programming Example...

  • Page 642: Saving Parameter File: Save

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.5.3 Saving parameter file: Save The MG3710A/MG3740A can restore the settings by saving and loading settings of frequencies, output levels, or modulation parameters. This section describes how to save the settings. Press Save of the panel key to display the Parameter Save dialog box, the File List dialog box, and the Parameter Save function menu.
  • Page 643 A destination path to save the file is the following directory in the specified drive. Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\Parameter Setting\ Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 644 Do not turn the power off while saving parameter files because they may be damaged. When you input a file name, an extension is automatically added. You cannot specify an extension. Destination path: Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\Parameter Setting\ Default destination name: Param[Date]_[Additional number].xml...
  • Page 645 Panel Keys A space or dot “.” at the beginning or the end of a file name causes a file name error, and the file cannot be saved. Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 646 Chapter 9 Other Functions Description of Function This function allows you to save the following items: Setting item common to SG1 and SG2. Other items are saved for SG1 or SG2. Table 9.5.3-3 Items Saved in a Parameter File System Items Frequency Frequency setting...
  • Page 647 Panel Keys Table 9.5.3-3 Items Saved in a Parameter File (Continued) System Items Sweep/List Freq On/Off Sweep/List function Sweep/List Freq On/Off Sweep/List Type * Sweep Repeat * Sweep Direction * Manual Mode On/Off * Manual Point * Sweep Out Setting * Sweep Start Frequency Sweep Stop Frequency Sweep Center Frequency...
  • Page 648 Chapter 9 Other Functions Table 9.5.3-3 Items Saved in a Parameter File (Continued) System Items Modulation On/Off Modulation AM Modulation On/Off function AM Depth Scale AM Depth (Lin) AM Depth (Log) AM Modulation Frequency FM Modulation On/Off FM Frequency Deviation FM Modulation Frequency φM Modulation On/Off φM Deviation Angle...
  • Page 649 Panel Keys Selected Waveform Pattern Name * Waveform Copy List Focus * RF Gate On/Off RF Gate Edit On/Off RF Gate Line RF Gate Offset 1 RF Gate Width 1 RF Gate Offset 2 RF Gate Width 2 RF Gate Frequency Start/Frame Trigger On/Off Start/Frame Trigger Mode Start/Frame Trigger Source...
  • Page 650 Chapter 9 Other Functions Pattern Trigger On/Off Pattern Trigger 1 On/Off Pattern Trigger 1 Source Pattern Trigger 1 Edge Pattern Trigger 2 On/Off Pattern Trigger 2 Source Pattern Trigger 2 Edge Pattern Trigger 3 On/Off Pattern Trigger 3 Source Pattern Trigger 3 Edge Pattern Trigger Switching Point Sync Type * Number of Slaves *...
  • Page 651 Panel Keys Table 9.5.3-3 Items Saved in a Parameter File (Continued) System Items I/Q Source I/Q modulation I/Q Output Internal Channel Correction Cal Type Wideband Analog I/Q Input I Offset * Analog I/Q Input Q Offset * Analog I/Q Output I Level Trimming * Analog I/Q Output Q Level Trimming * Analog I/Q Output I/Q Common Offset* Analog I/Q Output I Diff Offset *...
  • Page 652 Color * The following items are not saved: • Remote-control state (Remote or Local) • The type of the displayed function menu. The MG3710A/MG3740A always displays the top-level function menu after loading the setting. • Status of entered/displayed dialog boxes •...

  • Page 653: Recalling Parameter File: Recall

    Note: Do not turn the power off when loading a parameter file. When you turn the power off during loading, the MG3710A/MG3740A may start with undefined parameters. Note: The set parameter settings file cannot be recalled with a different option configuration.
  • Page 654 Chapter 9 Other Functions Displaying a parameter file list Reads out a list of all parameter files in the specified device. Remote command Query a list of all parameter files in the specified device Query :MMEMory:CATalog:STATe? <device> Response <number>,<filename_1>,<filename_2> ･･･ Parameter <device>...
  • Page 655 A file name with 101 characters or more cannot be loaded. If no parameter file exists, the “File not found” is displayed. Parameter files created with one MG3710A/MG3740A can be loaded by another MG3710A/MG3740A, but check firmware versions installed on each MG3710A/MG3740A. When the...

  • Page 656: Screen Copy: Copy

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.5.5 Screen copy: Copy Copies the screen displayed on the MG3710A/MG3740A and saves it in the specified folder. Press Copy of the panel key to display the Screen Copy dialog box, the File List dialog box, and the Screen Copy function menu.
  • Page 657 Panel Keys Remote command Set the file format of the screen copy Command :MMEMory:STORe:SCReen:MODE BMP|PNG Query :MMEMory:STORe:SCReen:MODE? Response <mode> Parameter File format <mode> BMP format PNG format (Default) Programming Example To save a hardcopy in the PNG format. MMEM:STOR:SCR:MODE PNG MMEM:STOR:SCR:MODE? >...
  • Page 658 Chapter 9 Other Functions Response <mode> NORM ， REV ， MONO or MREV Parameter <mode> Settings of colors Color, the same as the displayed screen (Default) NORMal Color, reversed REVerse Monochrome MONochrome Monochrome, reversed MREVerse Programming Example To set the screen hardcopy to reverse color. MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM REV MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM? >...
  • Page 659 A destination path to save the file is the following directory in the specified drive. Anritsu\MG3710A\User Data\Copy Files\ Up to 1000 files can be saved in a single folder. Saving more than 1000 files in a folder cause an error, and the file cannot be saved.
  • Page 660 Chapter 9 Other Functions Characters available for file names are displayed on the character pallet. The following characters cannot be used: \ / : * ? “ ” ‘ ’ < > | A space or dot “.” at the beginning or the end of a file name causes a file name error, and the file cannot be saved.

  • Page 661: Functions Specific To Remote Commands

    Panel Keys 9.5.6 Functions specific to remote commands This section describes the functions available only for remote commands. Screen display On/Off function Turns the LCD backlight and the display ON/OFF. Turning Off the display quickens operations because drawing is omitted. Remote command Turn the display On/Off Command...
  • Page 662 Chapter 9 Other Functions Screen power On/Off function Turns the screen power and display On/Off. Turning the screen power Off with this command can reduce the radiated interference from the monitor. However, operating a mouse, key board, panel key, and touch panel turns the power on again with the control of Windows.

  • Page 663: Calibration

    Returns to the menu before this menu is opened. Note: Execute Calibrate Level while the device to be tested is • connected to the RF connector of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Executing Calibrate Level with the RF connector opened may • degrade the level accuracy of output signals because of reflection.

  • Page 664: Touch Panel

    Chapter 9 Other Functions 9.6 Touch Panel The MG3710A/MG3740A has the touch panel function. Aged deterioration of touch panels may cause constellations to be less accurate than at the time of deployment. In such a case, we recommend you to calibrate them again.

  • Page 665: Setting Windows

    This section describes how to perform operations on Windows installed to the MG3710A/MG3740A and general notes. Setting Windows The MG3710A/MG3740A is set to default settings at factory shipment so as to perform optimal measurements. Changing the Windows settings is outside the scope of operation warranty. In addition, performance may drop or functions may not operate correctly when Windows settings are changed.

  • Page 666: Displaying Windows Desktop

    Windows Taskbar. Mouse Click the “Minimize” button located in the upper right corner of the application window of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Minimizing all applications displays the Desktop. Press on the front panel or right click, and click the Show the Desktop on the displayed menu.

  • Page 667: Setting Control Panel

    Setting Windows 9.7.2 Setting control panel Various Windows settings can be configured using the Control Panel. The following describes general notes on each setting. Although each setting can be set without using the Control Panel, use within the scope of the following restrictions (Table 9.7.2-1 and 9.7.2-2).
  • Page 668 Add Hardware • Do not delete devices already installed, or update or remove drivers. • The MG3710A/MG3740A may not operate normally due to conflicts with device drivers when new hardware is added. Add or Remove Programs • Do not update or remove programs installed at factory shipment.
  • Page 669 Setting Type Description Network Connections • TCP/IP settings may change when the MG3710A/MG3740A is remote-controlled via the Ethernet. Refer to Appendix E.3.2 “Ethernet interface settings” for details. • The IP address is set to use DHCP at factory shipment. Ensure that the network administrator settings are appropriate when connecting the MG3710A/MG3740A to a network.
  • Page 670 • Firewall settings are set to Off at factory shipment. When settings are set to On, a dialog for checking whether the Windows Firewall blocks applications of the MG3710A/MG3740A when applications are started the next time is displayed. Be sure to select “Unblock” at this time. 9-84...
  • Page 671 Setting Windows Figure 9.7.2-2 Control Panel (Windows 7) 9-85...
  • Page 672 • Displays and changes hardware settings. • Do not delete devices already installed, or update or remove drivers. • The MG3710A/MG3740A may not operate normally due to conflicts with device drivers when new hardware is added. Device and Printers • Displays and manages devices, printers and print jobs.
  • Page 673 • The Power Off function of the hard disk (Turn off Hard Disks) is disabled (Never). Do not change this setting. • Do not change power option settings other than those described above. The MG3710A/MG3740A will not operate normally after recovering from hibernation. Programs and Features •...
  • Page 674 On, a dialog for checking whether the Windows Firewall blocks applications of the MG3710A/MG3740A when applications are started the next time is displayed. Be sure to select “Unblock” at this time. • Antivirus software is not installed at factory shipment.

  • Page 675: Using External Display

    9.7.3 Using external display An external display can be connected to the VGA connector on the rear side of the MG3710A/MG3740A, to display screens of the MG3710A/MG3740A and show multiple displays. The following describes the operation procedure for this function.
  • Page 676 When not using an external display Single Display Notebook • When using only an external display Single Display Monitor • When displaying the MG3710A/MG3740A display to an external display Multiple Display Twin or Intel® Dual Display Clone • Primary Device Notebook •...

  • Page 677: General Notes

    Operation is not guaranteed when programs, including Windows Update, are added or updated. • When third party software is installed and/or executed, this may affect MG3710A/MG3740A operations. • Note that the MG3710A/MG3740A may not operate normally when registries are changed. 9-91...

  • Page 678: Storage Device Configuration

    Volume C : System Disk Windows, application software and files required for operation of the MG3710A/MG3740A are stored. Also, it is used as the destination for file input or output for application software of the MG3710A/MG3740A. The MG3710A/MG3740A may not operate normally when data necessary for operations of the MG3710A/MG3740A is changed or deleted.

  • Page 679: System Recovery Functions

    Restore System drive (partition) only This function restores only Volume C, in which Windows, application software, and files required for operations of the MG3710A/MG3740A are stored, to the factory shipment status. CAUTION To execute these functions, understand the following items for their use.
  • Page 680 Disconnect the MG3710A/MG3740A from the network if connected. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the mainframe then turn the MG3710A/MG3740A power On. The BIOS screen will appear a few seconds after later. Press F4 on the keyboard while the screen in Step 2 is displayed (not on the front panel of the mainframe).

  • Page 681: Chapter 10 Performance Test

    10.1 Overview of Performance Test ........10-2 10.1.1 Performance test ..........10-2 10.1.2 MG3710A performance test items and instruments used ..........10-3 10.2 Frequency Performance Test ........10-4 10.2.1 Frequency ............10-4 10.3 Output Level Performance Test ........

  • Page 682: Overview Of Performance Test

    If the tests results do not meet the specifications, failures are considered. Contact Anritsu Corporation or one of its distributors. Contact Anritsu Corporation or one of its distributors. CAUTION When the performance tests are performed, warm up the MG3710A/MG3740A and devices to be used with the tests for 30 minutes or more to stabilize them sufficiently.
  • Page 683 10.1 Overview of Performance Test 10.1.2 MG3710A/MG3740A performance test items and instruments used The MG3710A/MG3740A performance test items and instruments to be used for each item are described in Table 10.1.2-1. Table 10.1.2-1 Performance Test Items and Instruments Used Item...

  • Page 684: Frequency Performance Test

    Chapter 10 Performance Test 10.2 Frequency Performance Test 10.2.1 Frequency Set the frequency of the MG3710A/MG3740A within 9 kHz to upper limit frequency and measure the frequency with the frequency counter (MF2412C) to confirm the set frequency is correctly output.
  • Page 685 10.2 Frequency Performance Test Set the output frequency of the MG3710A/MG3740A to the value [FR (x)] in Table 10.2.1-1. 4.1 When x = 1 Connect RF Output of this equipment to Input2 of the frequency counter. Select Input2 at Input >F1 Input CH.
  • Page 686 Chapter 10 Performance Test Table 10.2.1-1 Frequency Setting Table FR (x) (MHz) 0.009 1000 1500 2000 2500 2700 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 X ≥ 10 are available only when the Upper limit frequency 4 GHz and 6 GHz options are installed. X ≥...

  • Page 687: Output Level Performance Test

    10.3 Output Level Performance Test 10.3 Output Level Performance Test 10.3.1 Output level frequency characteristics Measure the level of each frequency of the MG3710A/MG3740A for the reference level with the power meter (Anritsu ML2437A) and power sensor (MA24002A) . Test standards Absolute accuracy (18°...
  • Page 688 Perform the sensor calibration (zero point and sensitivity) for the ML2437A. Turn On the 1st RF Output of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Set the output level of the MG3710A/MG3740A to the value [LEV (1)] in Table 10.3.1-2. 10. Set frequencies of the MG3710A/MG3740A and ML2437A to the value [FR (1)] in Table 10.3.1-2.
  • Page 689 10.3 Output Level Performance Test Table 10.3.1-2 Absolute Accuracy Measurement Frequency Setting Table 1 FR (x) (MHz) LEV (x) (dBm) –5 –5 –7 –7 –7 –7 –7 1000 –7 1500 –7 2000 –7 2500 –7 2700 –7 3000 –7 3001 –7 3500 –7...
  • Page 690 Chapter 10 Performance Test Table 10.3.1-3 Absolute Accuracy Measurement Frequency Setting Table 2 FR (x) (MHz) LEV (x) (dBm) –5 –5 –10 –10 –10 –10 –10 1000 –10 1500 –10 2000 –10 2500 –10 2700 –10 3000 –10 3001 –10 3500 –10 4000...

  • Page 691: Vector Modulation Performance Test

    10.4.1 Vector accuracy The baseband signal is generated with the internal waveform pattern, and the vector modulation is performed with the MG3710A. The vector error in the modulated RF signal is measured by using a signal analyzer (MS2690A/91A/92A) in which signal analysis software has been installed.
  • Page 692 Chapter 10 Performance Test Output level ≤ +7 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141/071/171 is not installed), Output level ≤ +13 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141/071/171 is installed), Output frequency 600 M to 2700 MHz, After CAL execution at 18º to 28ºC ≤ 0.8% (rms) typ Output level ≤...
  • Page 693 10.4 Vector Modulation Performance Test LTE (20 MHz Test Model 3.1) Output level ≤ +4 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141/071/171 is not installed), Output level ≤ +10 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141/071/171 is installed), Output frequency 600 M to 2700 MHz, After CAL execution at 18º to 28ºC ≤...
  • Page 694 Set frequencies of the MG3710A and MS2690A/91A/92A to the value [FR (1)] in Table 10.4.1-2. Set the Cal Type of IQ Cal. of the MG3710A to DC to perform Cal. 10. Measure EVM (rms) (the maximum value for Storage Count) with the MS2690A/91A/92A.
  • Page 695 Set frequencies of the MG3710A and MS2690A/91A/92A to the value [FR (1)] in Table 10.4.1-3. Set the Cal Type of IQ Cal. of the MG3710A to DC to perform Cal. 10. Measure Phase Error (rms) (the maximum value for Storage Count) with the MS2690A/91A/92A.
  • Page 696 Set frequencies of the MG3710A and MS2690A/91A/92A to the value [FR (1)] in Table 10.4.1-5. Set the Cal Type of IQ Cal. of the MG3710A to DC to perform Cal. 10. Measure EVM (rms) (the maximum value for Storage Count) with the MS2690A/91A/92A.
  • Page 697 10.4 Vector Modulation Performance Test Table 10.4.1-1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Level Composition For the 1st RF, when For the 1st RF, when Option-043/143 is not Option-043/143 is installed installed For the 2nd RF, when For the 2nd RF, Option-073/173 is not when installed Option-073/173 is...
  • Page 698 Chapter 10 Performance Test Table 10.4.1-3 GSM Modulation Accuracy Measurement Frequency Table FR (x) (MHz) 1800 1900 Table 10.4.1-4 EDGE Modulation Accuracy Measurement Frequency Table FR (x) (MHz) 1800 1900 Table 10.4.1-5 LTE (20 MHz Test Model 3.1) Modulation Accuracy Measurement Frequency Table FR (x) (MHz) 1500...

  • Page 699: Chapter 11 Maintenance

    Chapter 11 Maintenance This chapter describes cautions related to daily maintenance, storage, and shipping of the MG3710A/MG3740A, as well as the calibration procedure to be used as preventive maintenance. 11.1 Daily Maintenance and Storage ........11-2 11.1.1 Daily maintenance .......... 11-2 11.1.2 Cautions before long-term storage ....

  • Page 700: Daily Maintenance And Storage

    AC outlet. Panel surface dirt When the panel surface dirt is noticeable, or when the MG3710A/MG3740A has been used in a dusty place, or before long-term storage, wipe the MG3710A/MG3740A with a cloth soaked in soapy water and wrung dry.

  • Page 701: How To Store Usb Memory

    11.1 Daily Maintenance and Storage Recommended storage conditions For long-term storage, it is recommended that the MG3710A/MG3740A is stored within the ranges of the environmental conditions below along with that the conditions for cautions before storage above are met.  Temperature The range of 0 to 45°C...

  • Page 702: Repacking And Transportation Upon Return

    11.2.1 Repacking Repacking Repack the MG3710A/MG3740A using the packing material (box) in which the MG3710A/MG3740A had been packed first. If the packing material has been discarded or damaged, repack the MG3710A/MG3740A with the method below: Pack the MG3710A/MG3740A with vinyl or others.

  • Page 703: Disposal

    11.3 Disposal 11.3 Disposal When the MG3710A/MG3740A is to be discarded, comply with regulations of each country and local government. Before discarding the MG3710A/MG3740A, dismantle or physically destroy any memory media it contains to ensure that any data saved in memory cannot be recovered by third parties.

  • Page 704: Calibration

    11.4.2 Device to be used for calibration Devices to be used for the calibration of the MG3710A/MG3740A are described in the table below. Table 11.4.2-1 Measuring Instrument for Calibration List...

  • Page 705: Calibrating Frequency With Oscilloscope

    The frequency calibration procedure with an oscilloscope is described. SG1 (MG3700A) Anritsu Freq. reference 10 MHz Reference In 10 MHz MG3710A/MG3740A RF Out 1 GHz SG2 (MG3700A) Buffer Out 10 MHz Anritsu Reference In 10 MHz RF Out 1 GHz Figure 11.4.3-1 Frequency Calibration Connection with Oscilloscope...
  • Page 706 The stationary displayed waveforms of the signal generator 1 and 2 (CH1 and CH2) input to the oscilloscope indicate that the frequency of the reference oscillator of the MG3710A/MG3740A is synchronized with the standard frequency and has a normal value.
  • Page 707 For the adjustment method for Reference Clock, Refer to 4.6.6 “Ref Clock Adjustment”. When it is adjusted and the output frequency of the MG3710A/MG3740A meets the standard frequency, the displayed waveform of the oscilloscope rests. Note: In actuality, the complete correspondence between waveforms of the output frequency and the standard frequency is not possible.

  • Page 708: How To Replace Hard Disk

    If the internal HDD and secondary HDD are faulty, contact our service representative for factory repair. Replacement procedure Turn off the power of the MG3710A/MG3740A and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet before replacement. Also, put the MG3710A/MG3740A on a flat horizontal bench top when working on <Procedure>...
  • Page 709 11.5 How to Replace Hard Disk Note: If the Hard Disk lamp on the front panel keeps lighting after HDD ASSY replacement, the HDD ASSY may not be inserted correctly. If so, turn off the power, disconnect the power cable from the power outlet, remove the HDD ASSY once, and insert it again.

  • Page 710: Troubleshooting

    This section explains possible causes and measures for them when the MG3710A/MG3740A does not operate correctly. If any troubles are not described in this section or taking measures below does not improve the symptoms, contact Anritsu Corporation or one of its distributors. Table 11.6-1 Troubleshooting...
  • Page 711 11.6 Troubleshooting Table 11.6-1 Troubleshooting (Continued) Problem Possible Cause Measure The remote control mode Remote control has been Disconnect Ethernet, press is not enabled with GPIB. executed with Ethernet. switch to the local control mode, and then execute the connection with GPIB again.
  • Page 712 When Baseband Clock Check if the Baseband Clock signal Source is Ext input externally is correct. Cases other than the above The MG3710A/MG3740A may be broken. Contact Anritsu Corporation or one of its distributors. NG is displayed to [0] When Ref Source is Auto Check if the reference signal input REF with Alarm History.

  • Page 713: Appendix A Specifications

    Typ. value is not the guaranteed performance with this specification; it is for reference. Nominal values are not guaranteed. It is a common specification for MG3710A and MG3740A, if not specified. <Conditions> Unless otherwise noted, function and performance are specified in the following conditions.
  • Page 714 When MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 or MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 not installed and output level ≤ +7 dBm: ≤600 µs Internal reference oscillator When MG3710A/MG3740A-001/101/002/102 is not installed: Aging rate ±1 × 10 /year Temperature stability ±2.5 × 10 (5 º to 45 º C) –6...
  • Page 715 Items Specifications Setting range 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-043/143 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-073/173 not installed 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 not installed, 042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 not installed, 072/172 not installed –110 dBm to +17 dBm 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 installed, 042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 installed, 072/172 not installed –110 dBm to +30 dBm...
  • Page 716 Appendix A Specifications <Output level> Continued Items Specifications Accuracy CW, at 18° to 28°C 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-043/143 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-073/173 not installed 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141/042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171/072/172 not installed Level Frequency ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤...
  • Page 717 Appendix A Specifications <Output level> Continued Items Specifications Accuracy 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 installed, 042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 installed, 072/172 not installed Frequency Level ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤ ±0.5 dB typ. –100 dBm<, +5 dBm Frequency Level , <...
  • Page 718 Appendix A Specifications <Output level> Continued Items Specifications Accuracy 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 not installed, 042/142 installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 not installed, 072/172 installed Frequency Level ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤ ±0.5 dB typ. –100 dBm<, +5 dBm Frequency Level , <...
  • Page 719 Appendix A Specifications <Output level> Continued Items Specifications Accuracy 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141/042/142 installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171/072/172 installed Level Frequency ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤ ±0.5 dB typ. –100 dBm<, +5 dBm Level Frequency , < 10 MHz , < 50 MHz ≤...
  • Page 720 –120 dBm < , –110 dBm ≤ ±2.5 dB typ. –127 dBm < , –120 dBm 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-043/143 installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-073/173 installed 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141/042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171/072/172 not installed Level Frequency ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤...
  • Page 721 ≤ ±0.8 dB –100 dBm<, –40 dBm ≤ ±0.8 dB –110 dBm<, –100 dBm 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 installed, 042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 installed, 072/172 not installed Frequency Level ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤ ±0.5 dB typ.
  • Page 722 ≤ ±0.8 dB –100 dBm<, –40 dBm ≤ ±0.8 dB –110 dBm<, –100 dBm 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 not installed, 042/142 installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 not installed, 072/172 installed Frequency Level ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤ ±0.5 dB typ.
  • Page 723 –100 dBm ≤ ±1.0 dB –120 dBm < , –110 dBm ≤ ±2.5 dB typ. –127 dBm < , –120 dBm 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141/042/142 installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171/072/172 installed Level Frequency ≤ 100 kHz , <1 MHz ≤ ±0.5 dB typ.
  • Page 724 Appendix A Specifications <Output level> Continued Items Specifications Accuracy Frequency Level , < 400 MHz ≤ ≤ ≤ 50 MHz 400 MHz 3 GHz ≤ ±0.6 dB +17 dBm<, +20 dBm ≤ ±0.6 dB ±0.6 dB +10 dBm<, +17 dBm ≤...
  • Page 725 –100 dBm < , –40 dBm ≤ ±0.3 dB typ. ±0.3 dB typ. –110 dBm < , –100 dBm 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 installed, 042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 installed, 072/172 not installed Reference: –7 dBm Level Frequency , < 400 MHz ≤...
  • Page 726 Appendix A Specifications <Output level> Continued Items Specifications Linearity 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 not installed, 042/142 installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 not installed, 072/172 installed Reference: –7 dBm Level Frequency , < 400 MHz ≤ ≤ ≤ 50 MHz 400 MHz 3 GHz ≤...
  • Page 727 –100 dBm < , –40 dBm ≤ ±0.4 dB typ. ±0.4 dB typ. –110 dBm < , –100 dBm 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 installed, 042/142 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 installed, 072/172 not installed Reference: –10 dBm Level Frequency , < 400 MHz ≤...
  • Page 728 Appendix A Specifications <Output level> Continued Items Specifications Linearity 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 not installed, 042/142 installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 not installed, 072/172 installed Reference: –10 dBm Level Frequency , < 400 MHz ≤ ≤ ≤ 50 MHz 400 MHz 3 GHz ≤...
  • Page 729 <Output connector> Items Specifications Connector Front panel, RF Output, 2nd RF Output (Opt), N-J connector, 50 Ω VSWR 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-043/143 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-073/173 not installed Frequency ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤...
  • Page 730 Appendix A Specifications <Signal purity> Items Specifications Harmonic At CW, Optimize S/N = Off spurious 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-043/143 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-073/173 not installed 1st SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-041/141 not installed, 2nd SG: MG3710A/MG3740A-071/171 not installed Level Frequency 3 GHz <...
  • Page 731 Appendix A Specifications <Signal purity> Continued Items Specifications Non-harmonic Under the conditions of –30 dBm ≤ output level ≤ +5 dBm, CW spurious generation, 10 kHz or more frequency offset from the output frequency. <–62 dBc (–70 dBc typ.) (100 kHz≤frequency≤187.5 MHz) <–68 dBc (–76 dBc typ.) (187.5 MHz<frequency≤750 MHz) <–62 dBc (–76 dBc typ.)
  • Page 732 AM Source = Sine, and modulation ratio m ≤ 90%. < (3% of the set value + 2%) (Nominal) In MG3710A, Under the conditions: peak level ≤ 4 dBm, 98 MHz ≤ frequency range ≤ 2700 MHz, AM Depth Type = Lin, after CAL execution, modulation rate = 1 kHz, AM Source = Sine, and modulation ratio m ≤...
  • Page 733 Specifications Distortion Under the conditions: (MG3710A) peak level ≤ 4 dBm, 100 kHz ≤ frequency range < 98 MHz, AM Depth Type = Lin, after CAL execution, modulation rate = 1 kHz, AM Source = Sine, and modulation ratio m = 30%.
  • Page 734 < 1% Modulation The following specifications is are applied only to the internal Frequency Response modulation (INT) when MG3710A/MG3740A-050/150/080/180 is not installed. In MG3710A, under the conditions: peak level ≤ 4 dBm, 100 kHz ≤ frequency range < 98 MHz, AM Depth Type = Lin, modulation ratio m = 30%, after CAL execution, and bandwidth within ±1.5 dB.
  • Page 735 Resolution: 0.1 Hz Deviation Accuracy In MG3710A, Under the conditions: output level≤ 4 dBm, 100 kHz + 2 ×(modulation rate + 2 × deviation) ≤ frequency ≤ 2700 MHz, after CAL execution, modulation rate = 1 kHz, FM Source = Sine, and 20 Hz ≤...
  • Page 736 < (1.84% of the set value + 20 Hz) (typ.) Distortion Under the conditions: (MG3710A) output level ≤ 4 dBm, 100 kHz + 2 ×(modulation rate + 2 × deviation) ≤ frequency ≤ 2700 MHz, after CAL execution, modulation rate = 1 kHz, FM Source = Sine, and deviation = 22.5 kHz.
  • Page 737 < 0.5% Modulation The following specifications is are applied only to the internal Frequency Response modulation (INT) when MG3710A/MG3740A-050/150/080/180 is not installed. In MG3710A, under the conditions: output level ≤ 4 dBm, 100 kHz + 2 ×(modulation rate + 2 × deviation) ≤ frequency ≤ 2700 MHz, deviation = 40 kHz, after CAL execution, and bandwidth within ±1 dB.
  • Page 738 Modulation The following specifications is are applied only to the internal Frequency Response modulation (INT) when MG3710A/MG3740A-050/150/080/180 is not installed. In MG3710A, under the conditions: output level ≤ 4 dBm, 100 kHz + 2 × (modulation rate + 2 × deviation ×...
  • Page 739 Phase –180 deg to 180 deg Phase resolution 0.1 deg External modulation When MG3710A/MG3740A-050/150/080/180 is installed and signal for 1st SG and 2nd SG respectively Modulation type AM, FM, φM Input Impedance 50 Ω/600 Ω/Hi-Z (100 kΩ/70 pF) (nominal) Coupling DC or AC is alternatively selectable.
  • Page 740 When MG3710A-043/143 is not installed: When W-CDMA (Test Model 4) is modulated: Output frequency: 800 MHz to 900 MHz, 1800 MHz to 2200 MHz, Output level≤+7 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141 is not installed), Output level≤+13 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141 is installed), ≤0.6% (rms) typ.
  • Page 741 1st SG (MG3710A) When W-CDMA (Test Model 4) is modulated: Output frequency: 800 MHz to 900 MHz, 1800 MHz to 2200 MHz, Output level≤+4 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141 is not installed), Output level≤+10 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141 is installed), ≤0.6% (rms) typ.
  • Page 742 (100 MHz≤frequency<4 GHz) ≤–45 dBc (4 GHz≤frequency) Image rejection In MG3710A, under the conditions of the temperature range between 18°C and 28°C, RMS Value = 0 dB, after CAL execution, and complex CW at 10MHz or less. ≤–50 dBc (200 MHz≤frequency<4 GHz) ≤–43 dBc...
  • Page 743 W-CDMA (Test Model 1 64DPCH) signal generation. 1st SG (MG3710A) When MG3710A-043/143 is not installed: 300 MHz≤Output frequency<800 MHz, Output level≤–2 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141 is not installed), Output level≤+5 dBm (When MG3710A-041/041 is installed), 5 MHz offset: ≤–68 dBc/3.84 MHz 10 MHz offset: ≤–70 dBc/3.84 MHz...
  • Page 744 Specifications ACLR When MG3710A-043/143 is installed: 1st SG (MG3710A) 300 MHz≤Output frequency<800 MHz, Output level≤–5 dBm (When MG3710A-041/141 is not installed), Output level≤+2 dBm (When MG3710A-041/041 is installed), 5 MHz offset: ≤–68 dBc/3.84 MHz 10 MHz offset: ≤–70 dBc/3.84 MHz 800 MHz≤Output frequency<1 GHz,...
  • Page 745 Specifications ACLR When MG3710A-073/173 is not installed: 2nd SG (MG3710A) 300 MHz≤Output frequency<800 MHz, Output level≤–2 dBm (When MG3710A-071/171 is not installed), Output level≤+5 dBm (When MG3710A-071/071 is installed), 5 MHz offset: ≤–68 dBc/3.84 MHz 10 MHz offset: ≤–70 dBc/3.84 MHz 800 MHz≤Output frequency<1 GHz,...
  • Page 746 Specifications ACLR When MG3710A-073/173 is installed: 2nd SG (MG3710A) 300 MHz≤Output frequency<800 MHz, Output level≤–5 dBm (When MG3710A-071/171 is not installed), Output level≤+2 dBm (When MG3710A-071/071 is installed), 5 MHz offset: ≤–68 dBc/3.84 MHz 10 MHz offset: ≤–70 dBc/3.84 MHz 800 MHz≤Output frequency<1 GHz,...
  • Page 747 Under the conditions of the temperature between 18°C and 28°C and during vector AWGN signal of bandwidth = 5 MHz. modulation 1st SG (MG3710A) When MG3710A-043/143 is not installed: Output level <–5 dBm: ±0.3 dB (50 MHz≤Output frequency<98 MHz) Output level<+1 dBm: ±0.2 dB (98 MHz≤Output frequency≤3 GHz) ±0.2 dB (3 GHz<Output frequency≤6 GHz)
  • Page 748 Appendix A Specifications <Vector modulation> Continued Items Specifications IQ input/output Base band IQ MG3710A or MG3740A with MG3740A-020/120 installed adjustment DC offset function Range: –20.000% to +20.000% Resolution: 0.025% Gain balancing Range: –1.000 dB to +1.000 dB function Resolution: 0.001 dB IQ adjustment Range: –10.00 deg to +10.00 deg...
  • Page 749 Output) Impedance: 50 Ω (Nominal) <Arbitrary waveform generator> Items Specifications Waveform resolution In MG3710A or MG3740A with MG3740A-020/120 installed I/Q is 14, 15, or 16 bits Modulation bandwidth In MG3710A or MG3740A with MG3740A-020/120 installed MG3710A: 160 MHz Bandwidth MG3740A:...
  • Page 750 Appendix A Specifications <Arbitrary waveform generator> Continued Items Specifications Internal Baseband In MG3710A or MG3740A with MG3740A-020/120 installed Reference clock signal Range 20 kHz to 200 MHz Resolution 0.001 Hz External Baseband When MG3710A-017/117 is installed: Reference clock signal Range...
  • Page 751 ± ((8 MHz × 0.8 – Wave form data bandwidth))/2 at the maximum Sequence function In MG3710A or MG3740A with MG3740A-020/120 installed The following functions can be executed by selecting combination files. Selecting a pattern switching method (manual or auto) •...
  • Page 752 <AWGN generating function> Items Specifications AWGN generating function 1st SG When MG3710A-049/149 is installed: Absolute value of CN ratio: ≤40 dB 2nd SG When MG3710A-079/179 is installed: Absolute value of CN ratio≤40 dB Band restriction filter When MG3710A-049/079/149/179 is installed: The band restriction of AWGN can be set in the following range.
  • Page 753 Appendix A Specifications <BER measurement function> Items Specifications When MG3710A/MG3740A-021/121 is installed: Connector Connector: Rear panel, AUX Connector Input level: TTL Input signal Data, Clock, Enable Input bit rate 100 bps to 40 Mbps Measurable patterns PN,9, PN,1, PN,5, PN,0, PN,3, AL,0, AL,1, Repeat of “01”...
  • Page 754 Rear panel, BNC-J, 50 Ω (Nominal) Frequency 10 MHz Output level ≥0 dBm (AC coupling) Start Frame TRIG In MG3710A or MG3740A with MG3740A-020/120 installed Input Connector Rear panel, BNC-J connector Output level Marker1 Output In MG3710A or MG3740A with MG3740A-020/120 installed...
  • Page 755 <Connector> Continued Items Specifications Sweep Output When MG3710A/MG3740A-017/117 is installed: Connector BNC-J at < 1 Ω (driving capability of up to 2 kΩ) on the rear panel Output level 0 to 10 V (while 10V level sweep is being executed),...
  • Page 756 ≤13.7 kg (with MS3710A/MG3740A-032,034 or 036 installed; excludes all other options) ≤17 kg (with all options installed; MG3710A-001, -002, -011, -017, -018, -021, -036, -041, -042, -043, -046, -048, -049, -050, -066, -071, -072, -073, -076, -078, -079, or MG3740A-001, -002, -011, -017, -020, -021, -036,...
  • Page 757 Appendix A Specifications <Environment performance> Items Specifications Conducted interference Conforms to EN 61326-1: 2006 Radiated interference Conforms to EN 61326-1: 2006 Harmonic current Conforms to EN 61000-3-2: 2006 +A1:2009 A2:2009 emission Electrostatic Discharge Conforms to EN 61326-1: 2006 Electromagnetic Conforms to EN 61326-1: 2006 immunity First transient/burst Conforms to EN 61326-1: 2006...
  • Page 758 A.2 Options <Option 001 Rubidium Reference Oscillator / Option 101 Rubidium Reference Oscillator Retrofit > Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-001, MG3740A-001 Rubidium Reference Oscillator MG3710A-101, MG3740A-101 Rubidium Reference Oscillator Retrofit Intended Use This option generates 10 MHz reference signal to enhance frequency stability.
  • Page 759 Intended Use Adds the analog I/Q input/output function. Refer to <IQ Input/Output>, IQ input, IQ output for details. <Option 020 Digital Modulation /Option 120 Digital Modulation Retrofit > Note: This option cannot be installed in MG3710A. Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3740A-020...
  • Page 760 Appendix A Specifications <Option 021 BER Test Function /Option 121 BER Test Function Retrofit > Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-021, MG3740A-021 BER Test Function MG3710A-121, MG3740A-121 BER Test Function Retrofit Intended Use Adds the BER measurement function. Refer to <BER measurement function> for details.
  • Page 761 Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-041, MG3740A-041 High Power Extension for 1st RF MG3710A-141, MG3740A-141High Power Extension for 1st RF Retrofit Intended Use Extends the maximum 1st RF output level. Refer to <Output level> for details. <Option 042 Low Power Extension for 1st RF / Option 142 Low Power Extension for 1st RF Retrofit>...
  • Page 762 <Option 048 Combination of Baseband Signal for 1st RF / Option 148 Combination of Baseband Signal for 1st RF Retrofit> Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-048, MG3740A-048 Combination of Baseband Signal for 1st RF MG3710A-148, MG3740A-148 Combination of Baseband Signal for 1st RF Retrofit Intended Use Adds the memory synthesizing function for synthesizing signals in the 1st RF baseband.
  • Page 763 <Option 050 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 1st RF / Option 150 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 1st RF Retrofit> Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-050, MG3740A-050 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 1st RF MG3710A-150, MG3740A-150 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 1st RF Retrofit Intended Use Adds the additional analog modulation function for 1st RF.
  • Page 764 <Option 071 High Power Extension for 2nd RF / Option 171 High Power Extension for 2nd RF Retrofit> Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-071, MG3740A-071 High Power Extension for 2nd RF MG3710A-171, MG3740A-171 High Power Extension for 2nd RF Retrofit Intended Use Extends the maximum 2nd RF output level.
  • Page 765 <Option 078 Combination of Baseband Signal for 2nd RF / Option 178 Combination of Baseband Signal for 2nd RF Retrofit> Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-078, MG3740A-078 Combination of Baseband Signal for 2nd RF MG3710A-178, MG3740A-178 Combination of Baseband Signal for 2nd RF Retrofit Intended Use Adds the memory synthesizing function for synthesizing signals in the 2nd RF baseband.
  • Page 766 <Option 080 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 2nd RF / Option 180 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 2nd RF Retrofit> Items Specifications Model/Symbol MG3710A-080, MG3740A-080 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 2nd RF MG3710A-180, MG3740A-180 Additional Analog Modulation Input for 2nd RF Retrofit Intended Use Adds the additional analog modulation function for 2nd RF.

  • Page 767: Appendix B Error Messages

    Appendix B Error Messages Error Messages List ........... B-2...
  • Page 768 B.1 Error Messages List Message Description Operation is canceled — -100 Command error Failed to analyze command syntax. -108 Parameter not allowed Received more-than-required number of parameters for header. -109 Missing parameter Received less-than-required number of parameters for header. -113 Undefined header Undefined program header.
  • Page 769 Message Description -200 Execution error There is insufficient space on memory to load Long pattern. -200 Execution error The waveform already exists on memory A. -200 Execution error The waveform already exists on memory B. -200 Execution error The same Long pattern already exists on memory. -200 Execution error Cannot load with current condition.
  • Page 770 Message Description -221 Settings conflict Operation restricted by Multi SG Sync. -221 Settings conflict Operation disabled when Pattern Combination is Edit. -221 Settings conflict Operation disabled when Digital Modulation (Opt-020) not installed. -221 Settings conflict Parameter out of range or invalid: [Parameter] -221 Settings conflict Parameter out of range or invalid: [Header]Product Name...
  • Page 771 Message Description -221 Settings conflict Operation disabled when Sequence Pattern File is selected. -221 Settings conflict Operation disabled when Carrier is not included in output signal. -221 Settings conflict Operation disabled when Carrier is included in output signal. -221 Settings conflict Operation disabled when Marker1 Edit Mode B is Off.
  • Page 772 Message Description -221 Settings conflict Cannot find waveform A specified with combination. -221 Settings conflict Cannot find waveform B specified with combination. -221 Settings conflict Invalid waveform A file information -221 Settings conflict Invalid waveform B file information -221 Settings conflict The number of combination file reached upper limit.
  • Page 773 Message Description -222 Data out of range Setting value out of range -240 Hardware error Failed to communicate with Power Sensor. -241 Hardware missing Operation disabled when both Option 018 and Option 019 not installed. -241 Hardware missing Operation disabled when Digital BB I/Q Unit (Opt-019) not installed. -241 Hardware missing Operation disabled when 2nd SG (Opt-062, 064, 066) not installed.

  • Page 775: Appendix C Default Value List

    Appendix C Default Value List The default values are common to SG Port 1 and 2, if not specified. <System> Item Default SG Port <Frequency Functions> Item Default Frequency setting Frequency 1 GHz Frequency relative display On/Off Frequency relative display 0 Hz Frequency offset On/Off Frequency offset...
  • Page 776 Appendix C Default Value List <Output Level Main Function> Item Default Output RF output On/Off Output level –144.00 dBm Display unit Output level relative display On/Off Output level relative value 0 dB Output level offset On/Off Output level offset 0.00 dB Output level step 0.10 dB Limit level On/Off...
  • Page 777 Appendix C Default Value List <Sweep/List Function> Item Default Sweep Sweep/List Freq On/Off Sweep/List Level On/Off Sweep/List Type Sweep Sweep repeat Continuous Sweep Direction Manual Mode On/Off Manual Point Output setting Sweep Out setting Sweep Status Trigger Out Polarity Positive Sweep function setting Sweep start frequency 1.00000000000 GHz...
  • Page 778 Appendix C Default Value List <Modulation Function> Item Default Modulation Modulation On/Off Analog/Pulse modulation AM Modulation On/Off AM Depth scale Linear AM Depth (Lin) 0.1% AM Depth (Log) 3.00 dB AM modulation frequency 400.0 Hz Switching AM Source AM Waveform Sine AM Phase Adjust 0 deg...
  • Page 779 Appendix C Default Value List Item Default Optimize function for the analog modulation Spurious (MG3710A) Optimize Distortion (MG3740A) Digital modulation ARB On/Off RMS adjustment 0.00 dB Pattern generation mode Defined ARB Setup Pattern A On/Off Pattern B On/Off Pattern A output level –144.00 dBm...
  • Page 780 Appendix C Default Value List Item Default RF Gate RF Gate On/Off RF Gate edit On/Off RF Gate line Single RF Gate offset 1 0.00 RF Gate width 1 1.00 RF Gate offset 2 0.00 RF Gate width 2 1.00 RF Gate frequency 1.00 Start/Frame Trigger...
  • Page 781 Appendix C Default Value List Item Default Marker2 Polarity B Positive Marker3 Edit Mode A On/Off Marker3 Offset A 0.00 Marker3 Width A 1.00 Marker3 Cycle A 1.00 Marker3 Polarity A Positive Marker3 Edit Mode B On/Off Marker3 Offset B 0.00 Marker3 Width B 1.00...
  • Page 782 Appendix C Default Value List <Route Connectors> Item Default Route Input Connectors S/F Trigger SG1 S/F Trigger (MG3710A, MG3740A-020/120) (When MG3740A-020/120 is not installed) Pattern Trigger 1 Pattern Trigger 1 (MG3710A, MG3740A-020/120) (When MG3740A-020/120 is not installed) Pattern Trigger 2...
  • Page 783 Appendix C Default Value List <I/Q Modulation> Item Default I/Q Source Internal I/Q Output Internal Channel Correction I/Q Calibration Cal Type Wideband Analog I/Q Input Adjustments I Offset 0.000 V Q Offset 0.000 V Analog I/Q Output Adjustments I Level Trimming 100.0% Q Level Trimming 100.0%...
  • Page 784 Appendix C Default Value List <BER Measurement Functions> Item Default Measure Mode Continuous Data Type Count Mode Count Mode Data Data 1000 Error Resync Condition Auto Resync Threshold X Threshold Y 500 bits at SyncLoss Clear BER Interface Clock Edge Rise Data Polarity Positive...
  • Page 785 Appendix C Default Value List <Power Meter> Item Default Channel A On/Off Channel B On/Off Connection Settings Channel A Com Port Channel A Model MA24106A Channel B Com Port Channel B Model MA24106A Channel Settings Channel A Freq 1.00000000000 GHz Channel A Offset On/Off Channel A Offset 0.00 dB...

  • Page 786: Other Functions

    Appendix C Default Value List <Other Functions> Item Default Copy File Type Color Normal Others Screen display On/Off Knob hold On/Off <Save/Read Function> Item Default Saving/reading media C-12.
  • Page 787 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form Performance Test Result Form Test Report No. Location Date Test person in charge Equipment Name: MG3710A Vector Signal Generator / MG3740A Analog Signal Generator Serial No. Ambient ºC temperature Power Relative frequency humidity Remarks:...
  • Page 788 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form Output Frequency (Section 10.2.1) 1st RF Setting Results 0.009 MHz □ OK □ NG 100 MHz □ OK □ NG 300 MHz □ OK □ NG 600 MHz □ OK □ NG 1000 MHz □...
  • Page 789 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form 2nd RF Setting Results 0.009 MHz □ OK □ NG 100 MHz □ OK □ NG 300 MHz □ OK □ NG 600 MHz □ OK □ NG 1000 MHz □ OK □ NG 1500 MHz □...
  • Page 790 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form Output Level Frequency Characteristics (Section 10.3.1) 1st RF, without Option 043/143 Setting Uncertainty Minimum Maximum Results Frequency Output Rating Rating Frequency level 50 MHz –5 dBm –5.5 dBm –4.5 dBm ±0.27 dB 97 MHz 98 MHz 100 MHz –7.5 dBm...
  • Page 791 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form 2nd RF, without Option 073/173 Setting Uncertainty Minimum Maximum Results Frequency Output Rating Rating Frequency level 50 MHz –5 dBm –5.5 dBm –4.5 dBm ±0.27 dB 97 MHz 98 MHz 100 MHz –7.5 dBm –6.5 dBm ±0.27 dB 399 MHz...
  • Page 792 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form 1st RF, with Option 043/143 Setting Uncertainty Minimum Maximum Results Frequency Output Rating Rating Frequency level 50 MHz –8 dBm –8.5 dBm –7.5 dBm ±0.27 dB 97 MHz 98 MHz 100 MHz –10.5 dBm –9.5 dBm ±0.27 dB 399 MHz...
  • Page 793 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form 2nd RF, with Option 073/173 Setting Uncertainty Minimum Maximum Results Frequency Output Rating Rating Frequency level 50 MHz –8 dBm –8.5 dBm –7.5 dBm ±0.27 dB 97 MHz 98 MHz 100 MHz –10.5 dBm –9.5 dBm ±0.27 dB 399 MHz...
  • Page 794 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form Vector Accuracy (Section 10.4.1) Note: Waveform patterns are not included in the MG3740A; therefore the vector modulation performance test is not required. 1st RF Setting Maximum Results Rating System Frequency Output level W-CDMA 800 MHz (Test Model 4) 900 MHz 0.6% (rms) typ.
  • Page 795 Appendix D Performance Test Report Form 2nd RF Setting Results Maximum Rating Frequency System Frequency Output level W-CDMA 800 MHz (Test Model 4) 900 MHz 0.6% (rms) typ. 1800 MHz 1900 MHz 800 MHz 900 MHz 0.8% (rms) typ. 1800 MHz □...
  • Page 796 Appendix D Peformance Test Report Form D-10.

  • Page 797: Appendix E Remote Control

    Appendix E Remote Control This chapter provides an overview of the remote control operation of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Overview ............... E-3 Connection ..............E-4 E.2.1 GPIB connection ..........E-5 E.2.2 Ethernet connection .......... E-6 E.2.3 USB connection ..........E-7 Interface Settings ............E-8 E.3.1 GPIB interface settings ........
  • Page 798 Appendix E Remote Control (Main Application) ........... E-61 E.9.14 Extended Error Event Status register (Sub Application) ..........E-62 E.9.15 Extended End Event Status register (Sub Application) ..........E-63 E.9.16 Extended Event Status register operation ..E-64 E.10 Synchronization ............E-66 E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages .....

  • Page 799: Overview

     SH1, AH1, T6, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT0, C0, E2 (2) Ethernet (1000BASE-T) The Ethernet interface of the MG3710A/MG3740A can be used as a remote control interface conforming to the VXI-11 protocol using TCP/IP. Control programs can be described using VISA software supporting the VXI-11 protocol.

  • Page 800: Connection

    Appendix E Remote Control E.2 Connection Connect the MG3710A/MG3740A and an external controller (PC) to be used for remote control using the dedicated connector for the applicable interface on the rear panel. Connection cables are provided as additional parts with the MG3710A/MG3740A.

  • Page 801: Gpib Connection

    MG3710A/MG3740A. Connecting it while the power is on may damage internal circuits. Up to 15 devices, including the external controller (PC), can be connected into one MG3710A/MG3740A. Be sure to abide by the conditions shown below when connecting devices. GPIB connector...

  • Page 802: Ethernet Connection

    Note: Check the network settings before LAN connection. The destination LAN may be affected depending on settings. Use a LAN crossover cable to connect the MG3710A/MG3740A and an external device. Use a network hub when connecting to multiple external devices.

  • Page 803: Usb Connection

    Connection E.2.3 USB connection Connect the USB (Remote) connector on the rear panel and external devices using USB cables. The external controller (PC) can be connected to multiple devices via a USB hub, etc. External controller (PC) Connect using an USB cable. Figure E.2.3-1 Sample connection with one external device External controller (PC) USB hub...

  • Page 804: Interface Settings

    Appendix E Remote Control E.3 Interface Settings This section describes setting methods for the MG3710A/MG3740A and the external controller (PC) for remote control. Connecting a mouse or keyboard may be required to perform settings. E.3.1 GPIB interface settings Sets the GPIB Address Refer to 9.4.1 “Interface Setting”...

  • Page 805: Ethernet Interface Settings

    Ethernet settings by referring to <How to confirm and set IP address and subnet mask on Windows.> described on the next page. In case of using Windows VISTA to remotely control MG3710A/MG3740A, the resource name should be described as follows; When IP Address = 172.168.0.1:...
  • Page 806 Appendix E Remote Control <How to confirm and set IP address and subnet mask> For Windows Embedded Connect a keyboard. Press the Windows key to open the Start menu and then click Control Panel. (Or connect a mouse and move the pointer to the bottom of the screen by using it to open the Start menu.) The Control Panel window is displayed.
  • Page 807 Interface Settings On the Local Area Connection Properties window, click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) to display the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Change the settings according to the connection conditions. E-11...
  • Page 808 Appendix E Remote Control For Windows 7 Press the Windows key on the connected keyboard, and click the Control Panel from the Start menu. The Start menu is also displayed by moving the pointer of the connected mouse to the bottom of the screen.
  • Page 809 Interface Settings Click Network and Sharing Center in the Control Panel window to display the Network and Sharing Center window. Click Change adapter settings on the upper left to display the Network Connections window. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and click Properties to display the Local Area Connection Properties window.
  • Page 810 Appendix E Remote Control Select the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties to display the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window. Change the setting to meet the conditions of connection. E-14...

  • Page 811: Usb Interface Settings

    Interface Settings E.3.3 USB interface settings or Top > > Utility Sets the terminator (a terminator code). Refer to 9.4.1 “Interface Setting” for how to set it. Check Vendor ID, Product ID, and Serial Number displayed in the USB(B) Settings field. Refer to 9.4.3 “Instrument Info”...

  • Page 812: Interface Selection/Changing

    Local status and lights up in Remote status. To change the interface, the MG3710A/MG3740A must enter Local status again. Press on the front panel to enter Local status, then send a command via the desired interface.

  • Page 813: Initialization

    Initialization E.5 Initialization Initialization types and targets for the MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in the table below. Table E.5-1 Initialization level Item DCL/SDC Power On *RST *CLS Interface bus initialization  –  – – Message exchange initialization  Input buffer and output queue –...

  • Page 814: Language Mode

    Appendix E Remote Control E.6 Language Mode As a command to remotely control the MG3710A/MG3740A, you can select SCPI mode, which is a command format defined by the SCPI Consortium, or compatible modes, in which you can use commands for Anritsu's measuring instruments MG3700A, MG364x, MS269xA, and MS2830A.

  • Page 815: Scpi Device Message Details

    An example of transmitting a program message from the external controller (PC) program to the MG3710A/MG3740A with a PRINT or any other statement is shown below. Program Message...
  • Page 816 Appendix E Remote Control Program message Program message unit <Example> PRINT @1; “CONF:ACP；READ:ACP?” Multiple commands can be transmitted separately by separating them with semicolons (“;”). Program message unit Program header Program data Program header Control header Common command header E-20...
  • Page 817 SCPI Device Message Details Control header ： Short Form data Numeric data ： Long Form data Short Form data corresponds to the short form of SCPI. Long Form data corresponds to the long form of SCPI. Refer to the character program data for each specification.
  • Page 818 Appendix E Remote Control Character program data Defined strings of data are composed of any of the lowercase and uppercase alphanumeric characters A to Z and 0 to 9, and the underscore (“_”). Numeric program data Numeric program data is grouped into four types: integral (NR1), fixed-point decimal (NR2), floating-point decimal (NR3), and hexadecimal formats.
  • Page 819 SCPI Device Message Details Fixed-point decimal (NR2) (Integer part) (Fraction part) Decimal point  <0 to 9> <0 to 9>  – <0 to 9> <0 to 9> The decimal The digits in the point cannot be integer part can omitted.
  • Page 820 Appendix E Remote Control Floating-point decimal (NR3) (Mantissa part)  <0 to 9> <0 to 9>  – <0 to 9> <0 to 9> (Exponent part) <0 to 9> –  E denotes the power of 10, or the exponent. ...
  • Page 821 SCPI Device Message Details Hexadecimal data <0 to 9> Binary data ＃ 0 / 1 E-25...
  • Page 822 Appendix E Remote Control Suffix data The table below lists the suffix data that is used in the MG3710A/MG3740A. The suffix codes available vary depending on the function. Table E.7.1-1 Suffix codes Category Suffix Code Unit GHZ or GZ MHZ or MZ...
  • Page 823 SCPI Device Message Details String program data An arbitrary character string is enclosed by one pair of double quotation marks (“ ”) or single quotation marks (‘ ’). The characters that can be used vary depending on their function. ’ <Inserted>...

  • Page 824: Scpi Response Message Formats

    Appendix E Remote Control E.7.2 SCPI Response message formats The formats in which the external controller (PC) transmits response messages from the MG3710A/MG3740A by way of INPUT and other statements are described below. Response message Response message terminator Response message...
  • Page 825 SCPI Device Message Details Response data Character response data Numeric response data String response data Character response data Defined strings of data are composed of any of the lowercase and uppercase alphanumeric characters A to Z and the digits 0 to 9, and the underscore (“_”).
  • Page 826 Appendix E Remote Control Hexadecimal data <0 to 9> Binary data ＃ 0 / 1 String response data <Inserted> ” ” ” ASCII character other than a double quotation mark E-30...

  • Page 827: Structure Of Scpi Command

    SCPI Device Message Details E.7.3 Structure of SCPI command The SCPI commands are based on a layered structure. The commands are grouped according to their related functions, and each of them has a layer structure called a “sub-system”. SENSe FREQuency CENTer <freq>...

  • Page 828: Command Definition Method

    Appendix E Remote Control E.7.4 Command definition method :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer <freq> :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? :SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN <freq> :SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN? Example of SCPI command The command tree in the previous page comprises the SCPI commands listed above. Overviews of the SCPI command definitions are shown below. <Command Format>...

  • Page 829: Composition Of Commands

    >:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 1000000;SPAN 500000 E.7.6 Selecting SG1/2 Two SGs can be installed on the MG3710A/MG3740A. When the language mode is SCPI, the target SG can be selected with the beginning node of commands for controlling individual functions. To specify the target SG: Specify the beginning node of command "...
  • Page 830 Appendix E Remote Control The commands for specifying frequencies are provided examples. [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] <freq> Example 1: To select 1 GHz for the frequency of SG1 SOUR1:FREQ:CW 1GHZ, or SOUR:FREQ:CW 1GHZ Example 2: To select 2 GHz for the frequency of SG2 SOUR2:FREQ:CW 2GHZ Example 3: To activate SG2 and select 3 GHz for the frequency of SG2...

  • Page 831: Native Device Message Details

    An example of transmitting a program message from the external controller (PC) program to the MG3710A/MG3740A with a PRINT or any other statement is shown below. Program message...
  • Page 832 Appendix E Remote Control Program message Program message unit <Example> PRINT @1;”CNF 1GHZ;RLV 0DBM” Multiple commands can be transmitted separately by separating them with semicolons (;). Program message unit Program header Program data The program header of each IEEE488.2 common command begins with an asterisk ( ...
  • Page 833 Native Device Message Details Numeric program data Numeric program data is grouped into four types: integral (NR1), fixed-point decimal (NR2), floating-point decimal (NR3), and hexadecimal. Integral (NR1) <0 to 9>   Integral data can have leading zeros (e.g., 005, +005). ...
  • Page 834 Appendix E Remote Control Floating-point decimal (NR3) (Mantissa part)  <0 to 9> <0 to 9>  – <0 to 9> <0 to 9> (Exponent part) <0 to 9> –  E denotes the power of 10, or the exponent. ...
  • Page 835 Native Device Message Details Hexadecimal data <0 to 9> Binary data ＃ 0 / 1 E-39...
  • Page 836 Appendix E Remote Control Suffix data The table below lists the suffix data that is used. The suffix codes available vary depending on the function. Table E.8.1-1 Suffix codes Category Suffix Code Unit GHZ or GZ MHZ or MZ Frequency KHZ or KZ DBM or DM dB ...
  • Page 837 Native Device Message Details String program data Arbitrary character string enclosed by one pair of “ ” (double quotation marks) or ‘ ’ (single quotation marks). The characters that can be used vary depending on the function. ’ <Inserted> ’ ’...

  • Page 838: Native Response Message Formats

    Appendix E Remote Control E.8.2 Native Response message formats The formats in which the external controller (PC) transmits response messages from the MG3710A/MG3740A by way of INPUT and other statements are described below. Response message Response message terminator Response message...
  • Page 839 Native Device Message Details Character response data Defined strings of data are composed of any of the alphabetical lower case and upper case characters A to Z, the digits 0 through 9, and the underscore (_). Numeric response data Integer (NR1) <0 to 9>...
  • Page 840 Appendix E Remote Control Hexadecimal data <0 to 9> Binary data ＃ 0 / 1 String response data <Inserted> ” ” ” ASCII character other than ” E-44...

  • Page 841: Selecting Sg1/2

    Native Device Message Details E.8.3 Selecting SG1/2 Two SGs can be installed on the MG3710A/MG3740A. When the language mode is Native, individual functions of active SG are controlled. To activate SG, use the following command: SELECTSG 1|2 Refer to Appendix F.1.1 “Functions Device Messages Common to Measurement Equipment”.

  • Page 842: Status Structure

    Appendix E Remote Control E.9 Status Structure The Status Byte (STB) that is transmitted to the external controller (PC) complies with the IEEE488.1 standard. Its bit string, called a “status summary message,” provides summary information about the current data placed in a register or queue. E.9.1 IEEE488.2 standard status model The standard model of the status structure defined by IEEE488.2 is shown below.

  • Page 843: Status Byte (Stb) Register

    Status Structure In the status model, an IEEE488.1 status byte is used as the lowest-level status, which consists of seven summary message bits that are supplied from an upper status structure. The status data structure is organized into a register model and a queue model to generate these summary message bits.
  • Page 844 Appendix E Remote Control E.9.2 Status Byte (STB) register The STB register consists of an STB device and an RQS (or MSS) message. (1) ESB and MAV summary messages The ESB and MAV summary messages are described below. ESB summary message The ESB (Event Summary Bit) summary message is a message defined by IEEE488.2.

  • Page 845: Scpi Device-Dependent Summary Messages

    Status Structure E.9.3 SCPI Device-dependent summary messages The structure of the status byte register is as shown below when the SCPI mode is selected. OPERation Status Register OPER QUES QUEStionable Status Register Status Summary Error/Event Que Message Figure E.9.3-1 Status byte register in SCPI mode E-49...

  • Page 846: Native Device-Dependent Summary Messages

    EESB 0 to 3 are used as summary bits for application-specific Extended Event Status registers. Both LEESB3 and EESB2 correspond to the event status expansion of main application (SG1) of the MG3710A/MG3740A, and also both EESB1 and EESB0 correspond to that of the sub-application (SG2) of the MG3710A/MG3740A.

  • Page 847: Reading And Clearing Stb Register

    Status Structure E.9.5 Reading and clearing STB register The STB register is read by serial polling or by using an  STB? query. Either way, an STB message as defined by IEEE488.1 is read, but the value that is transmitted to bit6 (position) varies with each method used. The STB register can be cleared using the ...
  • Page 848 Appendix E Remote Control E.9.6 Service Request (SRQ) enable operation Bits 0 to 7 of the Service Request Enable (SRE) register control whether the corresponding bits of the STB register will generate an SRQ. The SRB register bits are associated with the STB register bits. If the STB register bit associated with a SRE register bit that is 1 is set to 1, the device sets the RQS bit to 1, issuing a service request to the external controller (PC).
  • Page 849 Status Structure Read from SRE register The SRE register is read using an *SRE? common query. A response message to this query is given as an integer between 0 and 255, equaling the sum of the values of the SRE register bits. Update SRE register The SRE register is written to using an *SRE common command with an integer between 0 and 255 as a parameter and with the SRE register bits...

  • Page 850: Standard Event Status Register Model

    Attempt to read data from the output queue when it is Query error (QYE) empty or queued data lost before it is read  Not used Set to 1 when the MG3710A/MG3740A has processed the Operation complete (OPC) *OPC command. E-54...

  • Page 851: Standard Event Status Register Operation

    Reports the status of signals such as measurement results. It is QUEStionable used to require service to external controller when an error Status register occurs. It is not used in MG3710A/MG3740A. OPERation Reports some of the statuses of MG3710A/MG3740A. Status register...
  • Page 852 Appendix E Remote Control The SCPI specification status register has the following configuration. Condition Transition Event Event Enable Register Filter Register Register      Logic Ｏ Ｒ Summary Message Figure E.9.9-1 Configuration of SCPI Specification Status Register Table E.9.9-2 SCPI Specification Status register configurations Register-Filter Operation...

  • Page 853: Scpi Specification Status Register Operation

    Status Structure E.9.10 SCPI specification status register operation How to operate the SCPI specification status register and error/event queue is shown below. Table E.9.10-1 SCPI Status register operation Register Operation :STATus:...:EVENt? Read This register is read using a query. Write This register cannot be written externally.
  • Page 854 Appendix E Remote Control Table E.9.10-1 SCPI Status register operation (Cont’d) Register Operation :STATus:...:PTRansition? Read :STATus:...:NTRansition? This register is read using a query :STATus:...:PTRansition Write :STATus:...:NTRansition SCPI Transition Filter This register is written using a command. (Main Application) This register is cleared when. (1) :STATus:PRESet command is received.

  • Page 855: Extended Event Status Register

    Status Structure E.9.11 Extended Event Status register When the language mode is Native, the application running on the MG3710A/MG3740A has a specific extended event status register and an enable register. The extended event status register transmits a summary message to EESB0 to EESB3 bits of the status byte register.
  • Page 856 Appendix E Remote Control E.9.12 Extended Error Event Status register (Main Application) The operation model of the Extended Error Event Status registers for the Main Applications is shown below. Main Application indicates 1st SG. The target of the status register and the enable register is 1st SG.
  • Page 857 Status Structure E.9.13 Extended End Event Status register (Main Application) The operation model of the Extended End Event Status registers of Main Applications is shown below. Main Application indicates 1st SG. The target of the status register and the enable register is 1st SG. Figure E.9.13-1 Extended End Event Status register (Main Application) The Extended End Event Status Enable register (on the left of the figure above) specifies which bit of the Event Status register will cause a...
  • Page 858 Appendix E Remote Control E.9.14 Extended Error Event Status register (Sub Application) The operation model of the Extended Error Event Status registers for Sub Applications (an example with Application a) is shown below. Sub Application indicates 2nd SG. The target of the status register and the enable register is 2nd SG.

  • Page 859: Extended End Event Status Register

    Status Structure E.9.15 Extended End Event Status register (Sub Application) The operation model of the Extended End Event Status registers of Sub Applications (an example with Application a) is shown below. Sub Application indicates 2nd SG. The target of the status register and the enable register is 2nd SG.

  • Page 860: Extended Event Status Register Operation

    Appendix E Remote Control E.9.16 Extended Event Status register operation The operation methods for the Extended Event Status registers and Extended Event Status Enable registers are shown in the table below. Table E.9.16-1 Extended Event Status Register Operation Register Operation Read This register is read using an ESR3? query.
  • Page 861 Status Structure Table E.9.16-1 Extended Event Status Register Operation (Cont’d) Register Operation Read This register is read using an ESR1? query. Write This register cannot be written externally. This register is cleared when: Extended Error Event <1> The *CLS command is received. Status Register <2>...

  • Page 862: Synchronization

    Appendix E Remote Control E.10 Synchronization This section describes synchronized control of the MG3710A/MG3740A (completing processing of a command message before proceeding to the next one). The following methods can be used for controlling synchronization: (1) Using the *WAI command...
  • Page 863 E.10 Synchronization ( 2 ) Using the *OPC This method transmits *OPC (Operation Complete), which is the IEEE488.2 common command, to wait until bit0 (OPC) of the standard event status register is enabled, indicating the operation completes. To wait an event, query a standard event status register directly or use a service request.
  • Page 864 Appendix E Remote Control ( 3 ) Using the *OPC? This method queries a response of *OPC? (Operation Complete Query), which is the IEEE488.2 common command. <Program example> To select a waveform pattern after loading of a waveform pattern completes This example uses the following overlap command: :MMEMory[1]|2:LOAD:WAVeform:WMA|WMB|LONG|COMBination <string1>,<string2>[,<device>]...

  • Page 865: Ieee488.2 Common Device Messages

    E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages Described below are the IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages intended to execute the functions of the MG3710A/MG3740A. E.11.1 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages List Table E.11-1 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages Comman Function...

  • Page 866: Ieee488.2 Common Device

    Appendix E Remote Control Table E.11-1 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages (Continued) Comman Function Query Response Remarks SCPI mode bit7 : OPER bit6 : MSS/RQS bit5 : ESB bit4 : MAV bit3 : QUES bit2 : QUE bit1 : Not used Service Request Enable Register *SRE n bit0 : Not used...

  • Page 867: Messages Details

    E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages E.11.2 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages Details This section describes detailed specifications on IEEE488.2 common device message remote control commands for executing MG3710A/MG3740A functions in alphabetical order. *CLS Clear Status Command Function Clears the status byte resister, standard event status register, extended event status register and output queue data, and disables the wait for operation completion set by *OPC / *OPC? This is a common IEEE488.2...
  • Page 868 Appendix E Remote Control *ESE/*ESE? Standard Event Status Enable Command/Query Function Sets the standard event status enable register. The standard event status enable register value is returned for the query. This is a common IEEE488.2 command/query. Command *ESE n Query *ESE? Response Parameter...
  • Page 869 E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages *ESR? Standard Event Status Register Query Function Returns the standard event status register value. If this is queried, the standard event status register is cleared. This is a common IEEE488.2 query. Query *ESR? Response Parameter Standard event status register Value = bit0 + bit1 + bit2 + bit3 + bit4 + bit5 + bit6 + bit7...
  • Page 870 Function This command queries the device information. This is a common IEEE488.2 query. Query *IDN? Response company,model,serialnumber,firmware Parameter Manufacturer (ANRITSU) company Product model (7-character alphanumeric) model Serial number (10-digit number) serialnumber Version number of this application firmware Example of Use...
  • Page 871 E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages *OPC/*OPC? Operation Complete Command/Query Function *OPC / *OPC? is a command/query to synchronize between the device and the external controller (PC). This is a common IEEE488.2 command/query. If a *OPC command is received, the operation completion bit (bit 0) is set to 1 once all active processes are complete.
  • Page 872 Appendix E Remote Control *RST Reset Command Function Initializes the device. This is a common IEEE488.2 command. Command *RST Details Initializes the settings and status of all loaded applications. Example of Use To initialize the device *RST E-76...
  • Page 873 E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages *SRE/*SRE? Service Request Enable Command/Query Function Sets the service request enable register. The service request enable register value is returned for the query. This is a common IEEE488.2 command/query. Command *SRE n Query *SRE? Response Parameter Service request enable register Value...
  • Page 874 Appendix E Remote Control Details This is not initialized by the System Reset (Preset) command. This is initialized by Power On. Example of Use Enables the ESB service request. *SRE 32 *SRE? >32 E-78...
  • Page 875 E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages *STB? Status Byte Register Query Function Returns the status byte register value. This is a common IEEE488.2 query. Query *STB? Response Parameter Status byte register Value = bit0 + bit1 + bit2 + bit3 + bit4 + bit5 + bit6 + bit7 SCPI mode bit0 : 2 Not used...
  • Page 876 Appendix E Remote Control *TRG Trigger Control Function This command requests the trigger execution. Command message *TRG Explanation This command executes processing related to trigger input. Example of Use To execute trigger. *TRG Controller  MG3710A/MG3740A E-80...
  • Page 877 E.11 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages *TST? Self-Test Query Function Returns the result of the self test. This is a common IEEE488.2 query. Query *TST? Response Parameter Status byte register Value = bit0 + bit1 + bit2 + bit3 + bit4 + bit5 + bit6 + bit7 bit0 : 2 Not used bit1 : 2...

  • Page 878: Scpi Device Message

    Appendix E Remote Control E.12 SCPI Device Message This section describes SCPI device messages for status registers. E.12.1 OPERation status register The following table and figure show the layer structure of the OPERation Status Register. NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED Status Byte Register DB7 Sweeping BERT Measuring...

  • Page 879: Operation Status Register

    E.12 SCPI Device Message Table E.12-2 lists device messages for the OPERation Status Register. Table E.12-2 Device Messages Related to OPERation Status Register Device Message Function Operation Status Register :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? Event Operation Status Register :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? Condition Operation :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer> Status Register Enable :STATus:OPERation:ENABle? Operation Status...

  • Page 880: Scpi Device Message Details

    Appendix E Remote Control E.12.2 SCPI device message details This section describes SCPI device messages for the OPERation status register. :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? Operation Status Register Event Function This command queries the event register of the OPERation Status Register. Query :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? Response <integer>...
  • Page 881 E.12 SCPI Device Message :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? Operation Status Register Condition Function This command queries the content of the condition register of the OPERation status register. Query :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? Response <integer> Parameter Bit sum of condition register <integer> Resolution Range 0 to 65535 Details This command is available only in SCPI mode.
  • Page 882 Appendix E Remote Control :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer> Operation Status Register Enable Function This command sets the event enable register of the OPERation Status Register. Command :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer> Parameter Bit sum of event enable register <integer> Resolution Range 0 to 65535 Details This command is available only in SCPI mode.
  • Page 883 E.12 SCPI Device Message :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> Operation Status Register Negative Transition Function This command sets the transition filter (negative transition) of the OPERation status register. Command :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> Parameter Bit sum of transition filter (negative transition) <integer> Resolution Range 0 to 65535 Details This command is available only in SCPI mode.
  • Page 884 Appendix E Remote Control :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer> Operation Status Register Positive Transition Function This command sets the transition filter (positive transition) of the OPERation status register. Command :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer> Parameter Bit sum of transition filter (positive transition) <integer> Resolution Range 0 to 65535 Details This command is available only in SCPI mode.
  • Page 885 E.12 SCPI Device Message :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition? Operation Status Register Positive Transition Query Function This command queries the transition filter (positive transition) of the OPERation status register. Query :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition? Response <integer> Parameter Bit sum of transition filter (positive transition) <integer> Resolution Range 0 to 65535 Example of Use To query the transition filter (positive transition) of the OPERation...
  • Page 886 Appendix E Remote Control E-90.

  • Page 887: Appendix F Native Device Message Details

    Appendix F Native Device Message Details This chapter describes the compatible commands for controlling the MG3710A/MG3740A with the remote-control commands of the MG3700A. For the detailed specifications of each command, refer to MG3700A Vector Signal Generator Operational Manual (Mainframe) and “F.1 Native Device Message”...

  • Page 888: Native Device Messages

    Appendix F Native Device Message Details F.1 Native Device Messages Described below are the commands that do not exist on the MG3700A when controlling the MG3710A/MG3740A using the MG3700A compatible commands. Table F.1-1 MG3710A-MG3740A-MG3700A Common Device Messages Function Command Query...
  • Page 889 Native Device Messages Table F.1-1 MG3710A-MG3700A Common Device Messages (Cont’d) Function Command Query Response Remarks Extended Error Event Status ESE3? ESE3 n bit7 : Memory optimization Enable Register check error bit6 : Memory optimization error bit5 : Not used bit4 : Waveform pattern load...

  • Page 890: Functions Device Messages Common To Measurement Equipment

    Appendix F Native Device Message Details F.1.1 Functions Device Messages Common to Measurement Equipment ESE0/ESE0? Extended End Event Status Enable Register Function This command sets the extended end event status enable register of SG2. When an end event occurs, the end summary bit (ESB) value of the The end event status corresponding status byte register is set to 1 (true).
  • Page 891 Native Device Messages Example of Use To enable the waveform pattern loaded and the level setting complete of 2nd SG. ESE0 20 ESE0? > 20 Related Command ESR0? Queries the extended end event status register of 2nd SG. ESE1/ESE1? Extended Error Event Status Enable Register Function This command sets the extended error event status enable register of 2nd SG.
  • Page 892 Appendix F Native Device Message Details Details This command is available only in native mode. Example of Use To enable the waveform pattern load error and the level setting error of 2nd SG. ESE1 20 ESE1? > 20 Related Command Queries the extended error event status register of 2nd ESR1?
  • Page 893 Native Device Messages ESE2/ESE2? Extended End Event Status Enable Register Function This command sets the extended end event status enable register of 1st SG. When an end event occurs at 1st SG, the end summary bit (ESB) value of the corresponding status byte register is set to 1 (true).
  • Page 894 Appendix F Native Device Message Details ESE3/ESE3? Extended Error Event Status Enable Register Function This command sets the extended error event status enable register of 1st SG. When an error event occurs at 1st SG, the error summary bit (ESB) value of the corresponding status byte register is set to 1 (true).
  • Page 895 Native Device Messages ESR0? Extended End Event Status Register Query Function This command queries the extended end event status register of 2nd SG. After the query, this register is reset to 0. This command does not exist on the MG3700A. Query ESR0? Response...
  • Page 896 Appendix F Native Device Message Details ESR1? Extended Error Event Status Register Query Function This command queries the extended error event status register of 2nd SG. After the query, this register is reset to 0. This command does not exist on the MG3700A. Query ESR1? Response...
  • Page 897 Native Device Messages ESR2? Extended End Event Status Register Query Function This command queries the extended end event status register of 1st SG. After the query, this register is reset to 0. Query ESR2? Response Parameter Extended end event status register of 1st SG Value = bit0 + bit1 + bit2 + bit3 + bit + bit5 + bit6 + bit7 bit0 : 2...
  • Page 898 Appendix F Native Device Message Details ESR3? Extended Error Event Status Register Query Function This command queries the extended error event status register of 1st SG. After the query, this register is reset to 0. Query ESR3? Response Parameter Extended error event status register of 1st SG Value = bit0 + bit1 + bit2 + bit3 + bit + bit5 + bit6 + bit7 bit0 : 2...
  • Page 899 This command selects the corresponding SG to be operated with the remote command. This command does not exist on the MG3700A. It is used to select SG of the MG3710A/MG3740A. Setting a numeric value other than “1” and “2” causes an error. (Out of range)

  • Page 900: Mg3710A-Mg3700A Common Functions

    F.2 MG3710A-MG3700A Common Functions Note: Column SG1/2 of the compatible list shows whether the behavior changes according to the SELECTSG command. The SELECTSG command 1 is for SG1, and 2 is for SG2. √: N/A: Command not related to SG1/2.
  • Page 901 Table F.2.1-1 Compatible List of Device Messages Common to Applications (Cont’d) MG3710A/MG3740A MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Remarks Commands patibility Original Commands Command Reads the extended status enable register √ For notification of the error of SG2; Not existing on the ESE1? —...
  • Page 902 Table F.2.1-1 Compatible List of Device Messages Common to Applications (Cont’d) MG3710A/MG3740A MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Remarks Commands patibility Original Commands Command Header of the response message When the Language Mode is MG3700A and this function is turned on, inserts in capital letters all character strings of the header section of the query √...
  • Page 903 Setting a numeric value other than "1" and "2" causes an error. (Out of range) Queries the corresponding SG to be operated with the remote command. √ SELECTSG? [:SOURce]:PORT? — Command that does not exist on the MG3700A Queries the selected status of SG of the MG3710A/MG3740A...

  • Page 904: Frequency & Channel Function

    F.3.1 Frequency & Channel function Given below is the compatible list of the frequency & channel functions device messages. Table F.3.1-1 Compatible List of Frequency & Channel Functions Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands...
  • Page 905 Table F.3.1-1 Compatible List of Frequency & Channel Functions Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQ √ Increments the step of the frequency FIS? FIS? √ uency:STEP[:INCReme nt]? FREQSWSPEED Ν/Α Frequency switching speed Ν/Α...
  • Page 906 Table F.3.1-1 Compatible List of Frequency & Channel Functions Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the channel edit screen SCREEN √ This command is accepted but the screen is not SCREEN CHAN_EDIT —...
  • Page 907 Table F.3.1-1 Compatible List of Frequency & Channel Functions Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQ √ Entirely clears the channel table CHTBLALLCLR CHTBLALLCLR √ uency:CHANnels:DELe te:ALL [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQ CHTBL uency:CHANnels:EDIT CHTBL <ext_integer1>,<strin <ext_integer1>,<str...
  • Page 908 Table F.3.1-1 Compatible List of Frequency & Channel Functions Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Obtains the name of the channel table file Returns the name of the current channel table file √...

  • Page 909: Level Function

    F.4 Level Function F.4.1 Level function Given below is the compatible list of the level function device messages. Table F.4.1-1 Compatible List of Level Function Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the level screen √...
  • Page 910 Table F.4.1-1 Compatible List of Level Functions Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Switches the unit of the level Uses the unit specified by VDSPL, when DBU is :UNIT[1]|2:POWer √ OLU DBM|DBU OLU DBM|DBU √...
  • Page 911 Table F.4.1-1 Compatible List of Level Functions Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWe √ Turns the offset on/off OOF? OOF? √ r[:LEVel][:IMMediat e]:OFFSet:STATe? [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWe Turns the relative level on/off √ ORL ON|OFF ORL ON|OFF √...
  • Page 912 Table F.4.1-1 Compatible List of Level Functions Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWe √ Relative reference level ORLR? ORLR? √ r:REFerence? [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWe √ Relative output level ORLV l ORLV <rel_ampl> √...

  • Page 913: Modulation Functions

    F.5.1 Common to modulation functions Given below is the compatible list of device messages common to modulation functions Table F.5.1-1 Compatible List of Device Messages Common to Modulation Functions MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the modulation function screen √...

  • Page 914: Modulation

    F.5.2 Modulation Given below is the compatible list of the modulation device messages. Table F.5.2-1 Compatible List of Modulation Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Advanced Menu screen √ This command is accepted but the screen is not...
  • Page 915 Table F.5.2-1 Compatible List of Modulation Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands LOADEDFILESEL [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi LOADEDFILESEL √ Selects waveform files LONG,<string1>,<strin √ o:ARB:LONG:WAVeform LONG,s1,s2 g2> <string1>,<string2> [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi LOADEDFILESEL? Selects waveform files √ LOADEDFILESEL? LONG √...
  • Page 916 Table F.5.2-1 Compatible List of Modulation Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi Selects waveform files o:ARB:WMA|WMB:WAVef √ Operates similarly as the PAT? a PAT? WMA|WMB|LONG|COMB orm? √ LOADEDFILESEL…..command [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi o:ARB:WAVeform? [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi...
  • Page 917 Table F.5.2-1 Compatible List of Modulation Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi Pattern (WM(B)) Level √ PATWMBLVL l PATWMBLVL <ampl> √ o:ARB:WMB:POWer Does not depend on the AWGN converted value. <ampl>...
  • Page 918 Table F.5.2-1 Compatible List of Modulation Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi PATWMPOWRATIO √ A/B output ratio PATWMPOWRATIO l √ o:ARB:POWer:RATio <rel_ampl> <rel_ampl> [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi √ A/B output ratio PATWMPOWRATIO? PATWMPOWRATIO? √...
  • Page 919 Table F.5.2-1 Compatible List of Modulation Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Low Pass Filter AUTO|THROUGH|100KHZ|3 √ Setting is accepted, but no operational effect LPF a √ — 00KHZ|1MHZ|3MHZ|10MHZ occurs Default: AUTO...
  • Page 920 Table F.5.2-1 Compatible List of Modulation Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:S √ IQ Source IQSRC? IQSRC? √ OURce? [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:S √ IQ Source MODE INT|EXT MODE INT|EXT √ OURce INTernal|AEXTernal [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:S IQ Source √...

  • Page 921: Load Pattern

    F.5.3 Load pattern Given below is the compatible list of Load Pattern device messages. Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Load Pattern to Memory screen SCREEN √...
  • Page 922 Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :MMEMory[1]|2:LOAD: LDFILE? LONG, Loads waveform files WAVeform:LONG? √ LDFILE? LONG <string1>,<string2>[,<d √ C, when <device> is omitted <string1>,<string2> evice>] [,<device>]...
  • Page 923 Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :MMEMory[1]|2:LOAD: WAVeform:WMA? <string1>,<string2> [,<device>] Loads waveform files LDPAT? :MMEMory[1]|2:LOAD: C, when <device> is omitted WMA|WMB|LONG|COMB,<stri WAVeform:WMB? √ LDPAT? √...
  • Page 924 Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :MEMory[1]|2:WAVefo rm:WMA:NAME? <ext_integer> LOADEDFILENAME? LOADEDFILENAME? :MEMory[1]|2:WAVefo √ Queries the name of the loaded waveform file WMA|WMB|LONG|CO WMA|WMB|LONG|COMB, √ rm:WMB:NAME? MB, n <ext_integer>...
  • Page 925 Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :MEMory[1]|2:WAVefo rm:WMA:COUNt? PATNUM? PATNUM? :MEMory[1]|2:WAVefo Obtains the number of loaded files √ WMA|WMB|LONG|CO √ WMA|WMB|LONG|COMB rm:WMB:COUNt? :MEMory[1]|2:WAVefo rm:COUNt? Copies the waveform file from the external...
  • Page 926 Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :MEMory[1]|2:DELete :WAVeform[:NAME] <string1>,<string2> :MEMory[1]|2:DELete DELFILEWM :WAVeform:WMA[:NAME Deletes the waveform files on the selected DELFILEWM √ WMA|WMB|LONG|CO √ memory WMA|WMB|LONG|COMB,s1,s2 MB,s1,s2 <string1>,<string2>...
  • Page 927 Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :MEMory[1]|2:WAVefo rm:WMA:FREE? √ Obtains the free space of the memory WMSPC? WMA|WMB WMSPC? WMA|WMB √ :MEMory[1]|2:WAVefo rm:WMB:FREE? Optimizes the memory WMOPTIMIZE √...
  • Page 928 Table F.5.3-1 Compatible List of Load Pattern Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Queries the total size of the pattern files used by the combination file C, when <device> is omitted Returns in Byte the total size of wvd of each...

  • Page 929: Ext I/O Setup

    F.5.4 Ext I/O Setup Given below is the compatible list of the Ext I/O Setup device messages: Table F.5.4-1 Compatible List of Ext I/O Setup Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Ext I/O Setup screen √...
  • Page 930 Table F.5.4-1 Compatible List of Ext I/O Setup Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Start/Frame Trigger Delay Setting unit: In sample point, Resolution: 0.01 √ STDLY n STDLY <ext_numeric> √ — The setting of STDLY is as same as that of STDLYSYM (a/OverSampling) √...
  • Page 931 Table F.5.4-1 Compatible List of Ext I/O Setup Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi o:ARB:SEQuence:TRIG √ Pattern Trigger On/Off PATTRG ON|OFF PATTRG ON|OFF √ ger[:STATe] <boolean> [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi √ Pattern Trigger On/Off...
  • Page 932 Table F.5.4-1 Compatible List of Ext I/O Setup Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SOURce[1]|2]:RADi Marker Polarity MARKERPOL? √ MARKERPOL? n √ o:ARB:WMA:MARKer1|2 Valid only for WMA <ext_integer> |3:POLarity? Pulse Modulation Source...

  • Page 933: I/Q Tuning

    F.5.5 I/Q tuning Given below is the compatible list of the I/Q Tuning device messages: Table F.5.5-1 Compatible List of I/Q Tuning Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the I/Q Tuning screen √...
  • Page 934 I-phase or Q-phase on the √ ICOMOS l ICOMOS <voltage> ent:EXTernal:COFFse MG3710A/MG3740A refers to IQ Common Offset. t <voltage> (For example, if Q-phase is set after I-phase is set, the value of IQ Common Offset is the setting for Q-phase.)
  • Page 935 [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQA either I-phase or Q-phase on the √ QCOMOS? QCOMOS? Djustment:EXTernal: MG3710A/MG3740A refers to IQ, Common, COFFset? Offset. (For example, if Q-phase is set after I-phase is set, the value of IQ, Common, Offset is the setting for Q-phase.) [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQA I Differential Offset √...

  • Page 936: Edit Hdd

    F.5.6 Edit HDD Given below is the compatible list of Edit HDD device messages. Table F.5.6-1 Compatible List of Edit HDD Device Messages MG3700A Compat MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands ibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Edit HDD screen √...

  • Page 937: Sequence Progress

    F.5.7 Sequence Progress Given below is the compatible list of Sequence Progress device messages. Table F.5.7-1 Compatible List of Sequence Progress Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Sequence Progress screen √...

  • Page 938: Utility Function

    F.6.1 Common to utility functions Given below is the compatible list of device messages common to utility functions. Table F.6.1-1 Compatible List of Device Messages Common To Utility Functions MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the utility function top screen √...

  • Page 939: Save/Recall

    F.6.2 Save/Recall Given below is the comp able list of Save/Recall device messages. Table F.6.2-1 Compatible List of Save/Recall Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Parameter Save/Recall screen SCREEN √...
  • Page 940 Table F.6.2-1 Compatible List of Save/Recall Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Selects media for Save/Recall. C drive when HDD is selected. √ Devices other than HDD whose drive letter is the...

  • Page 941: Ber Measurement

    F.6.3 BER Measurement Given below is the compatible list of the BER measurement device messages. Table F.6.3-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the BER measurement screen √...
  • Page 942 Table F.6.3-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :INPut:BERT[:BASeba √ Sets the Data polarity. BERDATA? BERDATA? nd]:DATA:POLarity? :INPut:BERT[:BASeba √ Sets the Clock polarity BERCLK RISE|FALL BERCLK RISE|FALL...
  • Page 943 Table F.6.3-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Enable level threshold level BERENBLTHLD? — — Sets Data Delay BERDATADELAY n — — Sets Data Delay BERDATADELAY? —...
  • Page 944 Table F.6.3-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASe √ Sets the measurement mode BERMODE? BERMODE? band]:MODE? BERCOUNTMODE [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASe Measurement end condition BERCOUNTMODE √ TIME|DATABIT|ERRO band]:STOP:CRITeria TIME specification is not supported...
  • Page 945 Table F.6.3-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Log output :MMEMory:STORe:BERT BERLOG √ Device specified by BERMEDIA when <device> is BERLOG s :LOG <string>[,<device>] omitted <string>[,<device>] [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASe √...
  • Page 946 Table F.6.3-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands FETCh:BERT:ERRor:RA √ Bit Error Rate BER? EP|ER BER? EP|ER [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASe √ Number of occurrences of Sync Loss. BERSYNCLOSS? BERSYNCLOSS?
  • Page 947 BER Measurement (Data Type Detail Setup) Given below is the compatible list of BER measurement (Data Type Detail Setup) device messages. Table F.6.4-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement (Data Type Detail Setup) Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility...
  • Page 948 Table F.6.4-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement (Data Type Detail Setup) Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Specifies the position of the top bit of the portion in [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASe √ the user pattern to be used for synchronization...
  • Page 949 Table F.6.4-1 Compatible List of BER Measurement (Data Type Detail Setup) Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASe √ Current user defined pattern file BERUSERPAT? BERUSERPAT? band]:PRBS:USER:PAT Tern? [:SENSe]:BERT[:BASe Current user defined pattern bit length √...

  • Page 950: Alarm Monitor

    F.6.5 Alarm Monitor Given below is the compatible list of Alarm Monitor device messages. Table F.6.5-1 Compatible List of Alarm Monitor Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Alarm Monitor screen SCREEN √...
  • Page 951 Table F.6.5-1 Compatible List of Alarm Monitor Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Selects media for Alarm History output C drive when HDD is selected √ Devices other than HDD whose drive letter is the...

  • Page 952: Interface Setup

    F.6.6 Interface Setup Given below is the compatible list of the Interface Setup device messages. Table F.6.6-1 Compatible List of Interface Setup Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Interface Setup Interface Setup screen √...

  • Page 953: Network Setup

    F.6.7 Network Setup Given below is the compatible list of the Network Setup device messages: Table F.6.7-1 Compatible List of Network Setup Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Network Setup Interface Setup...
  • Page 954 Table F.6.7-1 Compatible List of Network Setup Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Subnet mask SUBNET? — — To be set on Windows DNSAUTO ON|OFF — — To be set on Windows DNSAUTO? —...
  • Page 955 Table F.6.7-1 Compatible List of Network Setup Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands IP Address Release IPRELEASE — — To be set on Windows MAC Address MACAD? — — To be set on Windows...

  • Page 956: Common Setup

    F.6.8 Common Setup Given below is the compatible list of the Common Setup device messages: Table F.6.8-1 Compatible List of Common Setup Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Common Setup screen SCREEN √...
  • Page 957 Table F.6.8-1 Compatible List of Common Setup Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands :MMEMory:STORe:SCRe Bitmap Setup BITMAPS BITMAPS en:THEMe √ COLOR:Color, GRAY:Monochrome, REV:Reverse COLOR|GRAY COLOR|GRAY|REV|MREV NORMal|REVerse|MONO MREV:Monochrome&Reverse chrome|MREVerse :MMEMory:STORe:SCRe √ Bitmap Setup...

  • Page 958: Maintenance Check

    F.6.9 Maintenance Check Given below is the compatible list of Maintenance Check device messages: Table F.6.9-1 Compatible List of Maintenance Check Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Maintenance Check screen SCREEN √...

  • Page 959: Hardware Check

    F.6.10 Hardware Check Given below is the compatible list of Hardware Check device messages. Table F.6.10-1 Compatible List of Hardware Check Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Hardware Check screen √...
  • Page 960 Table F.6.10-1 Compatible List of Hardware Check Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands CPU port serial number SERNUMCPU? — Not supported due to the CPU port version number BOARDCPUVER? — different HW structure.
  • Page 961 Table F.6.10-1 Compatible List of Hardware Check Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Product Information screen SCREEN √ This command is accepted but the screen is not SCREEN UTIL_PRDINF —...

  • Page 962: Install

    F.6.11 Install Given below is the compatible list of Install device messages. Table F.6.11-1 Compatible List of Install Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Moves to the Install screen SCREEN √ This command is accepted but the screen is not...

  • Page 963: Ieee488.2 Common Commands

    F.7 IEEE488.2 Common Commands F.7.1 Common to IEEE488.2 Given below is the IEEE488.2 common command device messages available on the MG3710A/MG3740A Table F.7.1-1 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Same as the compatible √...
  • Page 964 Table F.7.1-1 IEEE488.2 Common Device Messages (Cont’d) MG3700A Com- MG3710A/MG3740A MG3710A/MG3740A Remarks Commands patibility Compatible Command Original Commands Same as the compatible √ Read Status Byte Query *STB *STB command Same as the compatible √ Trigger Command *TRG *TRG command...

  • Page 965: Appendix G Scpi Compatible Command

    Appendix G SCPI Compatible Command This appendix describes SCPI commands for signal generators supported by the MG3710A/MG3740A. Supported signal generators Agilent N5162A/N5182A Basic Function Commands .......... G-2 G.1.1 Correction Subsystem ........G-2 G.1.2 Digital Modulation Subsystem ......G-4 G.1.3 Frequency Subsystem ........G-10 G.1.4 List/Sweep Subsystem ..........

  • Page 966: Basic Function Commands

    G.1 Basic Function Commands G.1.1 Correction Subsystem Correction Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.1.1-1. Table G.1.1-1 Correction Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:CORRection:FLATness:FREQuency [:SOURce[1]|2]:CORRection:FLATness:FRE  ? <point> Quency? <ext_integer> [:SOURce]:CORRection:FLATness:INITializ Not supported.
  • Page 967 Table G.1.1-1 Correction Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:CORRection:FLATness:STEP:STOP Not supported. ? [MAXimum|MINimum] Folder fixed. Cannot use [:SOURce]:CORRection:FLATness:STORe [:SOURce[1]|2]:CORRection:FLATness:STO  msus. "<file name>" Re <string>[,<device>] Not supported. [:SOURce]:CORRection:PMETer:CHANnel A|B Not supported. [:SOURce]:CORRection:PMETer:CHANnel? [:SOURce]:CORRection:PMETer:COMMunicate Not supported.

  • Page 968: Digital Modulation Subsystem

    G.1.2 Digital Modulation Subsystem Digital Modulation Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.1.2-1. Table G.1.2-1 Digital Modulation Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. [:SOURce]:BURSt:STATe ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. [:SOURce]:BURSt:STATe? [:SOURce]:DM:CORRection:OPTimizati Not supported.
  • Page 969 Table G.1.2-1 Digital Modulation Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:DM:INTernal:CHANnel:OPTi Not supported. mization? [:SOURce]:DM:INTernal:EQUalization Not supported. :FILTer:SELect "Filter" [:SOURce]:DM:INTernal:EQUalization Not supported. :FILTer:SELect? [:SOURce]:DM:INTernal:EQUalization Not supported. :FILTer:STATe ON|OFF|1|0 [:SOURce]:DM:INTernal:EQUalization Not supported. :FILTer:STATe? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:DELay [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:DELay ...
  • Page 970 Table G.1.2-1 Digital Modulation Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal Not supported. :CMRange? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal:  :COFFset <value> COFFset <voltage> [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal:  :COFFset? COFFset? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal:  :DIOFfset <value> DIOFfset <voltage> [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal: ...
  • Page 971 Table G.1.2-1 Digital Modulation Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal:  :DQOFfset <value> DQOFfset <voltage> [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal [:SOURce[1]]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal:  :DQOFfset? DQOFfset? Value is input in % [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:IOFFset  units. :IOFFset <value> <percent> Value is output in %...
  • Page 972 Table G.1.2-1 Digital Modulation Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:EXTernal N/A :QSKew? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:GAIN [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:GAIN  <value><unit> <rel_ampl>  [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:GAIN? [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:GAIN? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:IOFFset [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:IOFFset  <value><unit> <percent> [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:IOFFset  [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:IOFFset? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:PHASe [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:PHASe  <value><unit> <phase> ...
  • Page 973 Table G.1.2-1 Digital Modulation Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:QSKew? [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:QSKew? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:SKEW [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:SKEW  <value> <time>  [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment:SKEW? [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:IQADjustment:SKEW? [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment[:STATe] Not supported. ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. [:SOURce]:DM:IQADjustment[:STATe]? [:SOURce]:DM:POLarity[:ALL] [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:POLarity[:ALL]  NORMal|INVert NORMal|INVert  [:SOURce]:DM:POLarity? [:SOURce[1]|2]:DM:POLarity[ ：...

  • Page 974: Frequency Subsystem

    G.1.3 Frequency Subsystem Frequency Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.1.3-1. Table G.1.3-1 Frequency Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:FREQuency:CENTer  [:SOURce[1]]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq> <num>[<freq_suffix>]|UP|DOWN [:SOURce]:FREQuency:CENTer?  [:SOURce[1]]:FREQuency:CENTer? [MAXimum|MINimum] [:SOURce]:FREQuency:CHANnels:BAND [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:CHANnels:BAND ...
  • Page 975 Table G.1.3-1 Frequency Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:FREQuency:MULTiplier [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:MULTiplier  <value> <ext_numeric>  [:SOURce]:FREQuency:MULTiplier? [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:MULTiplier? [:SOURce]:FREQuency:OFFSet  <value><unit> [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:OFFSet <freq>  [:SOURce]:FREQuency:OFFSet? [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:OFFSet? [:SOURce]:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe  ON|OFF|1|0 <boolean>  [:SOURce]:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe? [:SOURce[1]|2]:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe? [:SOURce]:FREQuency:REFerence Not supported.
  • Page 976 Table G.1.3-1 Frequency Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STOP? [:SOURce[1]]:FREQuency:STOP? Not supported. [:SOURce]:PHASe:REFerence [:SOURce]:PHASe[:ADJust] [:SOURce[1]|2]:PHASe[:ADJust]  <value><unit> <ext_numeric>  [:SOURce]:PHASe[:ADJust]? [:SOURce[1]|2]:PHASe[:ADJust]? [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth:EX Not supported. Ternal<value>[<units>]|NARRow|WIDE |MINimum|MAXimum|DEFault [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth:EX Not supported. Ternal? |MINimum|MAXimum| [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:FREQuency:EX [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:FREQuency:EXTern ...

  • Page 977: List/Sweep Subsystem

    G.1.4 List/Sweep Subsystem List/Sweep Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.1.4-1. Table G.1.4-1 List/Sweep Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  [:SOURce]:LIST:CPOint? [:SOURce]:LIST:CPOint?  [:SOURce]:LIST:DIRection UP|DOWN [:SOURce]:LIST:DIRection UP|DOWN  [:SOURce]:LIST:DIRection? [:SOURce]:LIST:DIRection? Not supported.
  • Page 978 Table G.1.4-1 List/Sweep Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  [:SOURce]:LIST:MANual? [:SOURce]:LIST:MANual?  [:SOURce]:LIST:MODE AUTO|MANual [:SOURce]:LIST:MODE AUTO|MANual  [:SOURce]:LIST:MODE? [:SOURce]:LIST:MODE? Not supported. [:SOURce]:LIST:OPTions <val>{,<val>} Not supported. [:SOURce]:LIST:OPTions? Not supported. [:SOURce]:LIST:OPTions:POINts? Not supported. [:SOURce]:LIST:POWer <value>{,<value>} Not supported.
  • Page 979 Table G.1.4-1 List/Sweep Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. [:SOURce]:LIST:WAVeform <name>{,<name>} Not supported. [:SOURce]:LISt:WAVeform?  [:SOURce]:LIST:WAVeform:POINts? [:SOURce]:LIST:WAVeform:POINts?  [:SOURce]:SWEep:CPOint? [:SOURce]:SWEep:CPOint?  [:SOURce]:SWEep:DWELl <value> [:SOURce[1]|2]:SWEep:DWELl <time>  [:SOURce]:SWEep:DWELl? [:SOURce[1]|2]:SWEep:DWELl?  [:SOURce]:SWEep:POINts <value> [:SOURce[1]|2]:SWEep:POINts <value>...

  • Page 980: Fast Subsystem

    G.1.5 Fast Subsystem Fast Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.1.5-1. Table G.1.5-1 Fast Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :FAST:FP <Freq mHz>, <power mdB> Not supported. :FAST:FREQuency <Freq mHz>...

  • Page 981: Marker Subsystem

    G.1.6 Marker Subsystem Marker Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.1.6-1. Table G.1.6-1 Marker Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:MARKer:AMPLitude[:STATe] Not supported. ON|OFF|1|0 [:SOURce]:MARKer:AMPLitude[:STATe] Not supported. [:SOURce]:MARKer:AMPLitude:VALue Not supported. <num>[DB] Not supported.
  • Page 982 Table G.1.6-1 Marker Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:MARKer[0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 Not supported. ,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19][ :STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 [:SOURce]:MARKer[0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 Not supported. ,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19][ :STATe]?

  • Page 983: Power Subsystem

    G.1.7 Power Subsystem Power Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.1.7-1. Table G.1.7-1 Power Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth|BWIDth Not supported. <num>{freq suffix] Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth|BWIDth? [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth|BWIDth:A Not supported. UTO ON|OFF|1|0 [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth|BWIDth:A Not supported.
  • Page 984 Table G.1.7-1 Power Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch:REFerence:L Not supported. EVel <value> [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch:REFerence:L Not supported. EVel? [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch:SPAN:START Not supported. <value><units> Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch:SPAN:START? [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch:SPAN:STOP Not supported. <value><units> Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch:SPAN:STOP? [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch:SPAN:TYPE Not supported.
  • Page 985 Table G.1.7-1 Power Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SOURce Not supported. INTernal|DIODe Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SOURce? [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SOURce:EXTernal:CO Not supported. UPling <value>DB [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SOURce:EXTernal:CO Not supported. UPling? Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC[:STATe]? [:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation Not supported.
  • Page 986 Table G.1.7-1 Power Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:BYPass Not supported. ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:BYPass? [:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OF [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediat  FSet <value><unit> e]:OFFSet <rel_ampl> [:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OF [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediat  FSet? e]:OFFSet? [:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:A [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediat  MPLitude] <value><unit> e][:AMPLitude] <ampl>...
  • Page 987 Table G.1.7-1 Power Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks [:SOURce]:POWer:NOISe:[STATe] [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:NOISe:[STATe]  ON|OFF|1|0 <boolean>  [:SOURce]:POWer:NOISe:[STATe]? [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:NOISe:[STATe]? [:SOURce]:POWer:PROTection[:STATe] Not supported. ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:PROTection[:STATe]? Not supported. [:SOURce]:POWer:REFerence <value><unit>  [:SOURce]:POWer:REFerence? [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:REFerence? [:SOURce]:POWer:REFerence:STATe [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:REFerence:STATe  ON|OFF|1|0 <boolean>...
  • Page 988 Table G.1.7-1 Power Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  [:SOURce]:POWer:STOP <value><unit> [:SOURce[1]]:POWer:STOP <ampl>  [:SOURce]:POWer:STOP? [:SOURce[1]]:POWer:STOP?  [:SOURce]:POWer:USER:MAX <ampl> [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:USER:MAX <ampl>  [:SOURce]:POWer:USER:MAX? [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:USER:MAX? [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:USER:ENABle  [:SOURce]:POWer:USER:ENABle <0|1> <boolean>  [:SOURce]:POWer:USER:ENABle? [:SOURce[1]|2]:POWer:USER:ENABle?

  • Page 989: System Commands

    G.2 System Commands G.2.1 Calibration Subsystem Calibration Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.2.1-1. Table G.2.1-1 Calibration Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :CALibration:ALC:MODulator:BIAS  :CALibration:BBG:CHANnel :CALibration:BBG:CHANnel :CALibration:BBG:SKEW RFOut|EXTernal, Not supported.
  • Page 990 Table G.2.1-1 Calibration Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  :CALibration:IQ:TYPE DC|USER|FULL :CALibration[1]|2]:IQ:TYPE DC|USER  :CALibration:IQ:TYPE? :CALibration[1]|2]:IQ:TYPE? Not supported. :CALibration:IQ[:USER]...

  • Page 991: Communication Subsystem

    G.2.2 Communication Subsystem Communication Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.2.2-1. Table G.2.2-1 Communication Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :SYSTem:CAPability?  :SYSTem:ERRor:CODe[:NEXT]? :SYSTem:ERRor:CODe[:NEXT]?  :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess ...
  • Page 992 Table G.2.2-1 Communication Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS:DYNamic Not supported. ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS:DYNamic? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS:OVERride Not supported. ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS:OVERride? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS[:SERVer] Not supported. <ipstring> Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS[:SERVer]? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway Not supported.
  • Page 993 Table G.2.2-1 Communication Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:KEEP[:STATe]? Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MDNS ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MDNS? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MONitor Not supported. ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MONitor? Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:NBIos ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:NBIos? Not supported.

  • Page 994: Display Subsystem

    G.2.3 Display Subsystem Display Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.2.3-1. Table G.2.3-1 Display Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 Not supported. :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude[:STATe]? :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude:UNIT  :UNIT[1]|2:POWer DBM|DBUV|DBUVEMF DBM|DBUV|DBUVEMF|V|VEMF|DB ...
  • Page 995 Table G.2.3-1 Display Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks :DISPlay:CONTrast <value> Not supported. :DISPlay:CONTrast? Not supported.  :DISPlay:REMote ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:ENABle ON|OFF|1|0  :DISPlay:REMote? :DISPlay:ENABle?  :DISPlay[:WINDow][:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:ENABle ON|OFF|1|0  :DISPlay[:WINDow][:STATe]? :DISPlay:ENABle?

  • Page 996: Ieee 488.2 Common Commands

    G.2.4 IEEE 488.2 Common Commands IEEE 488.2 Common Commands device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.2.4-1. Table G.2.4-1 IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  *CLS *CLS  *ESE <data>...
  • Page 997 Table G.2.4-1 IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  *STB? *STB?  *TRG *TRG  *TST? *TST?  *WAI *WAI...

  • Page 998: Memory Subsystem

    G.2.5 Memory Subsystem Memory Subsystem device messages available in MG3710A/MG3740A are shown in Table G.2.5-1. Table G.2.5-1 Memory Subsystem Device Messages N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :MEMory:CATalog:BINary? Not supported. :MEMory:CATalog:DMOD? Not supported. :MEMory:CATalog:FIR? Not supported. :MEMory:CATalog:FSK? Not supported.
  • Page 999 Table G.2.5-1 Memory Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :MEMory:DATA? "<file_name>" :MEMory:DATA:APPend Not supported. "<file_name>",<data_block> :MEMory:DATA:FIR Not supported. "<file_name>",[REAL|COMPlex],osr,coeffi cient Not supported. :MEMory:DATA:FIR?"<file_name>" :MEMory:DATA:FSK "<file_name>",<num_states>,<f0>,<f1>,.. Not supported. .<f(n)>[,<diff_state>,<num_diff_states> ,<diff1>,...<diff(n)>] Not supported. :MEMory:DATA:FSK? "<file_name>"...
  • Page 1000 Table G.2.5-1 Memory Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :MEMory:DELete:MTONe Not supported. :MEMory:DELete:PTRain Not supported. :MEMory:DELete:SEQ Not supported. :MEMory:DELete:STATe Not supported. :MEMory:DELete:UFLT Not supported. :MEMory:DELete[:NAME] "<file name>" :MEMory:EXPort[:ASCii]:PTRAin Not supported. <"filename"> :MEMory:EXPort[:ASCii]:SEParator:COLumn Not supported.
  • Page 1001 Table G.2.5-1 Memory Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks Not supported. :MEMory:SIZE? <"filename"> :MEMory:STATe:COMMent Not supported. <reg_num>,<seq_num>,"<comment>" :MEMory:STATe:COMMent? Not supported. <reg_num>,<seq_num>  :MEMory:STORe:LIST "<file name>" :MMEMory:STORe:LIST <string>[,<device>] Not supported. :MMEMory:CATalog? "<msus>" Only supports waveform :MMEMory[1]|2:COPY[:NAME] ...
  • Page 1002 Table G.2.5-1 Memory Subsystem Device Messages (Continued) N5162A/N5182A Commands Compatibility MG3710A/MG3740A Compatible Command Remarks  :MMEMory:LOAD:WFM:ALL :MMEMory:LOAD:WFM:ALL [<device>] Not supported. :MMEMory:MOVE "<src_file>","<dest_file>"  :MMEMory:STORe:LIST "<file name>" :MMEMory:STORe:LIST <string>[,<device>] Not supported. :MMEMory:STORe:PTRain <"filename"> Not supported. :MMEMory:STORe:WFM:ALL :SYSTem:SANalyzer:COMMunicate:LAN:DEVic Not supported. e <deviceName>...

This manual is also suitable for:

Mg3740a

Table of Contents